Home

BMW 740Ld Owner's Manual

Contents

1. Direction of travel Head restraint Hook for upper retaining strap Mounting point eye Rear window shelf Seat backrest NO 1 fh WN Upper retaining strap Attaching the upper retaining strap to the mounting point 1 Remove the mounting point cover 2 Raise the head restraint 3 Guide the upper retaining strap between the supports of the head restraint Guide it over the head restraint of the mid dle seat 4 Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the mounting eye 5 Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down 6 Lower and lock head restraints as needed Locking the doors and windows Rear doors r Push the locking lever on the rear doors down The door can now be opened from the outside only Safety switch for the rear a Press button on the driver s door if children are being transported in the rear This locks various functions so that they can not be operated from the rear safety switch refer to page 49 71 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Driving Driving Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions
2. 129 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Safety Display in the Head up Display The warning is displayed simultane JAAN ously in the Head up Display and on the instrument cluster The displayed symbol can vary with the people detected When animals are detected an animal symbol is displayed System limits Basic limits System operation is limited in situations such as the following gt On steep hills in steep depressions or in tight curves gt When the camera is dirty or the protective glass is damaged In heavy fog rain or snowfall gt At very high external temperatures Limits of pedestrian and animal detection In some situations it may occur that pedes trians are detected as animals or animals as pedestrians Small animals are not detected by the object detection function even if they are clearly visi ble in the image Limited detection gt People or animals who are fully or partially covered especially when their heads are covered gt People who are not in an upright position e g lying down gt Cyclists on unconventional bicycles e g recumbent bicycles gt After physical damage to the system e g after an accident No display on the rear screen The image from Night Vision cannot be dis played on the rear screen 130 Lane departure warning The concept Starting at a specific speed this system alerts you when the veh
3. Ce YM S Reset tire inflation pressure Perform reset 6 Drive away The tires are shown in gray and the status is displayed After driving faster than 19 mph 30 km h for a short period the set tire inflation pressures are accepted as reference values The reset is completed automatically while driving After a successfully completed Reset the wheels on the Control Display are shown in green and Tire Pressure Monitor TPM active is displayed You may interrupt this trip at any time When you continue the reset resumes automatically Low tire pressure message The yellow warning lamp lights up A Check Control message is displayed gt There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure gt Noreset was performed for the system The system therefore issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures before the last reset 1 Reduce your speed and stop cautiously Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers 2 Check whether the vehicle is fitted with regular tires or run flat tires Run flat tires refer to page 216 are la beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire s sidewall Do not continue driving without run flat tires Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run flat tires continued driving may result in serious accidents lt A low tire inflation pressure might turn on DSC Dynamic Stability Control Actions i
4. Hints No loose objects in the car s interior Do not stow any objects in the car s inte rior without securing them otherwise they may present a danger to occupants e g during braking and evasive maneuvers lt Do not place anti slip mats on the dash board Do not place anti slip mats on the dashboard The mat materials could damage the dash board Storage compartments The following storage compartments are avail able in the vehicle interior gt Glove compartment on the driver s and front passenger side refer to page 180 gt Storage compartment in the center arm rest refer to page 181 in the front and rear gt Compartments in the doors Pockets on the backrests of the front seats gt Netin the front passenger footwell 180 Glove compartment Front passenger side Note Close the glove compartment again im mediately Close the glove compartment immediately af ter use while driving otherwise injury may oc cur during accidents Opening Pull the handle The light in the glove compartment switches on Closing Fold cover closed Opening the top cover Press button Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Storage compartments The top cover opens automatically Opening Closing the top cover Press the cover closed Driver s side Note Close the glove compartment again im mediately Press buttons next to the lock Close th
5. The engaged gear is displayed in the instru ment cluster e g S1 84 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Driving Controls Shift paddles The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow you to shift gears quickly while keeping both hands on the steering wheel gt Shift up briefly pull right shift paddle gt Shift down briefly pull left shift paddle Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine and road speeds for example downshifting is not possible if the engine speed is too high The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in strument cluster followed by the current gear If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are used to shift gears in automatic mode the transmission temporarily switches to manual mode In the manual mode after conservative driving for a certain amount of time or if there has been no acceleration or shifting of the shift paddles within a certain amount of time the transmission switches back to automatic mode Displays in the instrument cluster The selector lever position is dis _ played e g P Electronic unlocking of the transmission lock General information Electronically unlock the transmission lock to maneuver vehicle from the danger area Unlocking is possible if the started can spin the engine Engaging selector lever position N 1 Depress the brake pedal 2 Press the Start Stop button The starter must audibly start 3
6. a a a Select the desired unit Settings are stored for the profile currently in use 101 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Displays Brightness Setting the brightness To set the brightness of the Control Display Settings Control display Brightness pwp a Turn the controller until the desired bright ness is set 5 Press the controller Settings are stored for the profile currently in use Depending on the light conditions the bright ness settings may not be clearly visible Head up Display The concept This system projects important information into the driver s field of vision e g the speed The driver can get information without averting his or her eyes from the road Display visibility The visibility of the displays in the Head up Display is influenced by the following factors gt Certain sitting positions gt Objects on the cover of the Head up Dis play Sunglasses with certain polarization filters gt Wet roads 102 gt Unfavorable light conditions If the image is distorted check the basic set tings Switching on off pm Press button Display Overview Speed Navigation system Check Control messages M y y y Selection list from the instrument cluster gt Driver assistance systems Some of this information is only displayed briefly as needed Selecting displays in the Head up Display On the Cont
7. 5 820 2 640 950 431 2 780 1 261 3 155 1 431 220 100 17 7 500 Approved gross vehicle weight los kg Load los kg 5 865 2 660 1 035 469 5 940 2 694 950 431 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 249 RGG echnical data Approved front axle load los kg 2 865 1 300 2 890 1 311 Approved rear axle load los kg 3 150 1 429 3 195 1 449 Approved roof load capacity los kg 220 100 220 100 Cargo area capacity cu ft l 17 7 500 17 7 500 Approved gross vehicle weight los kg 6 065 2 751 Load los kg 905 411 Approved front axle load los kg 2 975 1 349 Approved rear axle load los kg 3 205 1 454 Approved roof load capacity los kg 220 100 Cargo area capacity cu ft l 17 7 500 Approved gross vehicle weight los kg 5 840 2 649 Load los kg 905 411 Approved front axle load los kg 2 80 1 261 Approved rear axle load los kg 3 175 1 440 Approved roof load capacity los kg 220 100 Cargo area capacity cu ft l 17 7 500 Capacities Fuel tank approx 21 1 80 Fuel quality refer to page 202 250 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Technical data Reference 251 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Reference Everything from A to Z Everything from A to Z Index A ABS Antilock Brake Sys tem 136 ACC Active Cruise Control with Stop amp Go 144 Accessories and parts 7 Activated charcoal filter 168 Active Blind Spot Detec tion 132 Active Cruise Control with S
8. On the roof drip rail press on the outside of the flap Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Loading Drivingtips tips Mounting The preparation for the mounting plate is lo cated below the roof drip rail Have the mount ing plate installed by the service center before installation of a roof rack Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for tilting and opening the glass sunroof Magnetic roof mounted luggage rack Because of the aluminum roof magnetic roof mounted luggage racks cannot be used Loading Because roof racks raise the vehicle s center of gravity when loaded they have a major ef fect on vehicle handling and steering re sponse Therefore note the following when loading and driving gt Do not exceed the approved roof axle loads and the approved gross vehicle weight Distribute the roof load uniformly The roof load should not extend past the loading area gt Always place the heaviest pieces on the bottom gt Secure the roof luggage firmly e g tie with ratchet straps gt Do not let objects project into the opening path of the trunk lid gt Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler ation and braking maneuvers Take corners gently 191 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Driving tips ecm Saving fuel Saving fuel Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered
9. Settings can be made for the following driving modes in Driving mode gt SPORT mode refer to page 142 gt ECO PRO mode refer to page 194 Displays in the instrument cluster Selected program The instrument cluster displays the selected program Program selection Pressing the button displays a FORL list of the selectable programs Depending on your vehicle s op tional features the list in the in strument cluster can differ from the illustration shown ECO PRO Display on the Control Display Program changes can be displayed briefly on the Control Display To do so make the following settings 1 Settings 2 Driving mode 3 Driving mode info 143 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Driving comfort Driving comfort Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Active Cruise Control with Stop amp Go function ACC The concept Use this system to select a desired speed that the vehicle will maintain automatically on clear roads To the extent possible the system automat
10. The Ultimate Driving Machine Contents aati A Z EE a THE BMW 7 SERIES OWNER S MANUAL BMW EfficientDynamics Less emissions More driving pleasure Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 7 Series Owner s Manual for Vehicle Thank you for choosing a BMW The more familiar you are with your vehicle the better control you will have on the road We therefore strongly suggest Read this Owner s Manual before starting off in your new BMW Also use the Integrated Owner s Manual in your vehicle It con tains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your BMW The manual also contains information designed to en hance operating reliability and road safety and to contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the printed or Integrated Owner s Manual are found in the appendix of the printed Quick Reference for the vehicle Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro chures in the onboard literature We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride BMW AG The Owner s Manual is available in many countries as an app Additional information on the Internet www omw com bmw_drivers_guide Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 2015 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich Germany Reprinting including excerpts only with the written
11. The highest level is active when three LEDs are lit After a short time the system automatically moves down one level in order to prevent ex cessive cooling Switch off mE Press button longer The LEDs go out Rear seats General information The switches for adjusting the seats are lo cated on the center armrest of the rear seats Center armrest When folding down the center armrest ensure that the area below the center head re straint is clear Otherwise injury may result Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Adjusting Controls Electrically adjustable seats 2 Seat tilt At a glance Forward backward tilt Backrest Adjust front passenger seat Reset to standard position Head restraint O 0O A WN Lumbar support The seats cannot be adjusted if the safety switch for the power windows has been pressed Lumbar support The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad Adjustments in detail justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re 1 Forward back gion of the spine The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture gt Press the front rear section of the switch The curvature is increased decreased gt Press the upper lower section of the switch The curvature is shifted up down 57 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Adjusting Adjusting the front passenger seat from the rear For more
12. You can check when your service center was notified On the Control Display Vehicle info Vehicle status Open Options S Last Service Request 96 Gear shift indicator The concept The system recommends the most fuel effi cient gear for the current driving situation Depending on the vehicle s features and coun try version of the vehicle the gear shift indica tor is active in the manual mode of the Step tronic transmission Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis played in the instrument cluster On vehicles without a gear shift indicator the engaged gear is displayed Displays Example Description Fuel efficient gear is set Speed limit detection Shift into fuel efficient gear The concept Speed limit detection Speed limit detection uses a symbol in the shape of a traffic sign to display the currently detected speed limit The camera in the area of the interior rearview mirror detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well as variable over head sign posts Traffic signs with extra sym bols for wet road conditions etc are also de tected and compared with the vehicle s onboard data such as for the rain sensor and will be displayed depending on the situation The system takes into account the information stored in the navigation system and also dis plays speed limits present on routes without signs Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Hi
13. 3 Adjust the parking position yourself if needed Interrupting manually The parking assistant can be interrupted at any time gt g Parking Assistant Select the symbol on the Control Display gt Py Press button Interrupting automatically The system is interrupted automatically in the following situations gt Ifthe driver grasps the steering wheel or if he takes over steering gt Ifa gear is selected that does not match the instruction on the Control Display gt Ifthe vehicle speed exceeds approx 6 mph 10 km h 163 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Driving comfort gt Possible on snow covered or slippery road surfaces gt When there are obstacles that are hard to overcome such as curbs gt When there are obstacles that suddenly arise gt Ifthe Park Distance Control PDC displays clearances that are too small gt Ifa maximum number of parking attempts or the time taken for parking is exceeded gt Ifa turn signal has been actuated contrary to the desired side for parking gt When switching to another function on the Control Display A Check Control message is displayed Resume An interrupted parking procedure can be con tinued if needed Follow the instructions on the Control Display to do this System limits No parking assistance The parking assistant does not offer assis tance in the following situations gt In ti
14. DTC Dynamic Traction Control The concept The DTC system is a version of the DSC where forward momentum is optimized The system ensures maximum headway on special road conditions or loose road surfaces e g unplowed snowy roads but with some what limited driving stability Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC provides maximum traction Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in curves Therefore drive with appropriate caution You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances gt When driving in slush or on uncleared snow covered roads 137 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Driving stability control systems gt When freeing vehicle from deep snow or driving off from loose grounds gt When driving with snow chains Deactivating activating DTC Dynamic Traction Control Activating DTC S we Press button TRACTION is displayed in the instru ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up Deactivating DTC r aa Press button again TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica tor lamp go out Indicator warning lights If DTC is activated TRACTION is displayed in the instrument cluster amp The indicator lamp lights up DTC Dy 5 namic Traction Control is activated xDrive xDrive is the all wheel drive system of your ve hicle Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC fu
15. Format 24h Symbol flashes network search BELGI 27 05 2012 j gt alll Wireless network is not available Format tt mm jjjj 3 Bluetooth is switched on A Roaming is active Text message was received 6 Turn the controller to set the hours and i l press the controller mO Check the SIM card 7 Turn the controller to set the minutes and m Sill card is blocked press the controller ZA SIM card is missing e a Enter PIN Status information Status field Entertainment symbols The following information is displayed in the status field at the top right gt Time CD DVD player gt Current entertainment source A Music collection P SOUN OULPU OGN Soe Gracenote database gt Wireless network reception strength E Phone aus 5 AUXIN port in the front or in the gt Traffic bulletin reception P USB audio interface Status field symbols Mobile phone audio interface The symbols are grouped as follows 22 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 iDrive Ataglance a glance Additional symbols Spoken instructions are turned off Split screen General information Additional information can be displayed on the right side of the split screen e g information from the on board comupter In the divided screen view the so called split screen this information remains visible even when you change to another menu Switching the split screen on and off On the Control D
16. Max Load IA Max Load AEREA CO The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo The greater the weight of the occupants the less cargo that can be transported Stowing cargo gt Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo gt Heavy cargo stow as far forward as possi ble directly behind and at the bottom of the rear passenger seat backrests gt Very heavy cargo when the rear seat is not occupied secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle Securing cargo Lashing eyes in the trunk To secure the cargo there are four lashing eyes in the cargo area 190 Securing cargo Securing cargo Stow and secure the cargo as described otherwise it may present a danger to the occu pants e g during braking and evasive maneu vers lt gt Smaller and lighter items secure with re taining straps or with a cargo net or draw straps gt Larger and heavy objects secure with cargo straps Cargo straps cargo netting retaining straps or draw straps on the lashing eyes in the trunk Roof mounted luggage rack Note Installation only possible in roof drip molding with flaps Your service center will be glad to advise you Roof racks are available as special accessories Securing Follow the installation instructions of the roof rack Roof drip rail with flaps P A 4 is A a a A i Pes a MM Y DA ze i ee oai di y
17. Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and necessarily available in your car e g due to Airbags 1 Front airbag driver 4 Side airbag 2 Front airbag front passenger 5 Knee airbags 3 Head airbag Front airbags Side airbags Front airbags help protect the driver and front In a lateral impact the side airbag supports the passenger by responding to frontal impacts in side of the body in the chest and lap area which safety belts alone would not provide ad equate restraint Head airbags In a lateral impact the head airbag supports the head 109 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Safety Knee airbag The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal impact Protective action Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa tion e g in less severe accidents or rear end collisions Information on how to ensure the optimal protective effect of the airbags gt Keep at a distance from the airbags gt Always grasp the steering wheel on the steering wheel rim holding your hands at the 3 o clock and 9 o clock positions to keep the risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible when the airbag is triggered gt There should be no person animals or ob jects between an airbag and a person gt Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area gt Dashbo
18. can not operate the glass sunroof and injure them selves lt Tilting the glass sunroof Push switch briefly upward gt The closed glass sunroof is tilted and the sliding visor opens slightly gt The opened glass sunroof closes until it is in its tilted position The sliding visor does not move Opening closing the glass sunroof and sliding visor separately gt Press the reel in the desired direction to the resistance point and hold it there The sliding visor opens as long as the reel is held down If the sliding visor is already fully open the glass sunroof opens The glass sunroof closes as long as the reel is held down If the glass sunroof is already closed or in the tilted position the sliding visor closes gt Press the reel in the desired direction past the resistance point The sliding visor opens automatically If the sliding visor is already fully open the glass sunroof opens automatically The glass sunroof closes automatically If the glass sunroof is already closed or in the tilted position the sliding visor closes au tomatically Pressing the reel upward stops the motion Opening closing the glass sunroof and sliding visor together Briefly press the reel twice in succession in the desired direc tion past the resistance point The glass sunroof and sliding vi sor move together Pressing the reel upward stops the motion gt See also Convenient opening
19. Information is displayed in the info display of the instrument cluster Information at a glance Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn signal lever calls up the following information in the info display gt Range Average consumption fuel Average consumption fuel V VvV V Miles and trip miles For a multi functional instrument display V Average speed gt Date Speed limit detection Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Displays Controls Not for a multi functional instrument dis play gt Time of arrival When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system gt Distance to destination When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system gt ECOPRO bonus range Adjusting the info display Depending on the vehicle equipment version you can select what information from the com puter is to be displayed on the info display of the instrument cluster On the Control Display 1 Settings 2 Instrument cluster 3 Select the desired displays Information in detail Range Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel It is calculated based on your driving style over the last 20 miles 30 km Average fuel consumption The average fuel consumption is calculated for the period while the engine is running The average fuel consumption is calculated for the distance traveled since the last reset by the on boar
20. Park Dis tance Control PDC 154 Manual operation parking brake 78 Manual operation rearview camera 156 Manual operation Side View 158 Manual operation Top View 160 Manual operation trunk lid 41 Marking on approved tires 215 Marking run flat tires 216 Massage seat front 55 Massage seat rear 58 Master key refer to Remote control 34 Maximum cooling 167 Maximum speed display 96 Maximum speed winter tires 215 Measure units of 101 Medical kit 238 Memory for seat mirrors steering wheel 63 Menu EfficientDynamics 195 Menu in instrument clus ter 98 Menus operating iDrive 18 Menus refer to iDrive operat Ing concept 19 Messages see Check Con trol 89 Microfilter 168 Minimum tread tires 214 Mirror 64 Mirror memory 63 257 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Reference Everything from A to Z Mobile communication devi ces in the vehicle 187 Mobility System 216 Modifications technical refer to Safety 7 Moisture in headlight 231 Monitor refer to Control Dis play 18 Mounting of child restraint systems 68 Multifunctional instrument display 87 Multifunction steering wheel buttons 14 N Navigation see user s manual for Navigation Entertain ment and Communication Neck restraints front refer to Head restraints 60 Neck restraints rear refer to Head restraints 61 Neutral cleaner see wheel cleaner 244 New wheels and tires 214 Night Vis
21. Press and hold the selector lever into posi tion N A corresponding Check Control message is displayed 4 Press the selector lever again into posi tion N within approx 6 seconds Position N is displayed in the instrument cluster 5 Release brake as soon as the starter stops D Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area and secure it against moving on its own 85 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Displays Displays Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the series It also describes features that are not respective features and systems necessarily available in your car e g due to Overview instrument cluster 6 1 Fuelgauge 93 5 Engine oiltemperature 93 2 Speedometer 6 Current fuel consumption 3 Messages e g Check Control 7 Electronic displays 86 4 Tachometer 93 8 Reset miles 94 Electronic displays gt Selection lists refer to page 98 gt Date refer to page 94 gt External temperature refer to page 94 gt Energy recovery refer to page 95 gt Auto Start Stop function refer to page 74 gt Transmission display refer to page 85 gt On board computer refer to page 98 gt Miules trip miles refer to page 94 86 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Messages e g Check Cont
22. The LED lights up park The indicator lamp lights up red The P parking brake is set While driving Use as emergency brake while driving Pull the reel and hold it The vehicle brakes hard while the reel is being pulled park The indicator lamp lights up red a sig nal sounds and the brake lights light up A Check Control message is displayed If the vehicle is slowed down down to a speed of approx 2 mph 3 km h the parking brake is set 76 Releasing With the ignition switched on Press the reel while stepping on the brake pedal or transmission position P is set The LED and indicator lamp go out The parking brake is released Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children e g can not release the parking brake lt Automatic release For automatic release step on the accelerator pedal The LED and indicator lamp go out The parking brake is automatically released when you step on the accelerator gt Engine on gt Drive mode engaged gt Driver buckled in and doors closed Inadvertent operation of the accelerator pedal Make sure that the accelerator pedal is not op erated unintentionally otherwise the vehicle is set in motion and there is a risk of an acci dent lt Automatic Hold The concept This system assists the driver by automatically setting and releasing the brake such as when moving in stop an
23. The camera in the area of the rearview mirror controls the system Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Safety Controls General information In daylight the system warns of possible colli sions with pedestrians at speeds from about 6 mph 10 km h to about 35 mph 60 km h shortly before a collision the system supports you with a braking intervention Under those circumstances it reacts to people who are within the detection range of the sys tem Detection range The detection area in front of the vehicle is div ided into two areas gt Central area arrow 1 directly in front of the vehicle gt Expanded area arrow 2 to the right and left A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo cated within the central area A warning is is sued about pedestrians who are located within the extended area only if they are moving in the direction of the central area Hints Personal responsibility The system does not serve as a substi tute for the driver s personal judgment of the traffic situation Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi cle s surroundings at all times otherwise acci dents are still possible despite all warnings lt Adapting your speed and driving style The displays and warnings of the system do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions Be alert Due to system limitations warnings may b
24. a glance EJ Function is deactivated Touchpad Some iDrive functions can be operated using the touchpad on the controller Selecting functions 1 Settings 2 Touchpad 3 Select the desired function gt Speller enter letters and numbers gt Interactive map viewing the interac tive map gt Browser enter Internet addresses Audio feedback pronounces entered letters and numbers Entering letters and numbers Entering letters requires some practice at the beginning When entering pay attention to the following gt For the input of upper lower case letters and numbers it may be necessary to reel via the controller to the corresponding In put mode refer to page 24 e g when the spelling of upper and lower case letters is identical gt Enter characters as they are displayed on the Control Display gt Always enter associated characters such as accents or periods so that the letter can be clearly recognized Possible input de pends on the set language Where neces sary enter special characters via the con troller gt To delete a character slide to the left on the touchpad gt To enter a blank space slide to the right in the center of the touchpad gt To enter a hyphen slide to the right in the upper area of the touchpad gt To enter an underscore swipe to the right in the lower area of the touchpad Using interactive map and Internet Via touch pad move the int
25. are being unlocked gt Interior lamps and courtesy lamps are acti vated This function is not available if the interior lamps were switched off manually gt The welcome lamps are switched on if this function was activated gt Exterior mirrors folded through convenient closing are folded open You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked For Settings refer to page 46 Anti theft protection is switched off The alarm system refer to page 47 is dis armed Convenient opening a Press and hold this button on the re mote control after unlocking 37 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Opening and closing The windows and the glass sunroof are opened as long as the button on the remote control is pressed Locking Locking from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside with people inside the car as the vehicle can not be unlocked from inside without special knowledge The driver s door must be closed 2 Press button on the remote control All doors the tailgate and the fuel filler flap are being locked Anti theft protection is switched on It pre vents the doors from being unlocked using the lock buttons or the door openers The alarm system refer to page 47 is armed Switching on interior lights and courtesy lights Press button on the remote control with the vehicle locked This function is not available if the interior lamps w
26. consent of BMW AG Munich US English II 15 03 15 490 Printed on environmentally friendly paper bleached without chlorine suitable for recycling Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 11 15 Addendum ADDENDUM TO OWNER S MANUAL We wanted to provide you with some updates and clarifications with respect to the printed BMW Owner s Manual These updates and clarifications will supersede the materials con tained in that document 1 Where the terms service center the ser vice center your service center service specialist or service are used in the Owner s Manual we wanted to clarify that the terms refer to a BMW dealer s service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with BMW specifications Where the text of the Owner s Manual con tains an affirmative instruction to contact a service center or your service center we wanted to clarify that BMW recom mends that if you are faced with one of the situations addressed by that text you con tact or seek the assistance of a BMW dealer s service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accor dance with BMW specifications While BMW of North America LLC at no cost to you will pay for repairs required by
27. de event of a breakdown pending on local regulations gt Ifthe electrical system has failed clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win Do not have the vehicle towed Have your vehicle transported on a load ing platform only otherwise damage may oc dow Cur lt Tow bar Tow truck The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle please observe the following gt Maneuvering capability is limited going around corners gt The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is secured with an offset The vehicle should only be transported ona l Tow rope loading platform When starting to tow the vehicle make sure Do not lift the vehicle that the tow rope is taut To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on the vehicle components when towing al ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or body and chassis parts otherwise damage may result Tow fitting The screw in tow fitting should always be car ried in the vehicle The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW 240 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 The tow fitting is located in the container on the inside of the trunk lid Tow fitting information on use gt Use only the tow fitting provided wit
28. g from operating the roller sunblinds using the switches in the rear Press the safety switch in the driver s door The LED lights up if the safety function is switched on If you are no longer able to move the roller sun blinds after having activated them consecu tively a number of times the system is blocked Press button for a limited time to prevent overheating Let Roller sunblinds for side windows the system cool The roller blind can only be extended or re The roller sunblinds cannot be moved at low tracted when the side window is closed interior temperatures Roller sunblind for rear window Driver s door controls Beeston Raising and lowering the roller sunblinds together Press and hold this button Glass sunroof powered Roller sunblind for rear window General information Press button The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be operated together or separately using the same switch Raising and lowering the roller blinds The glass sunroof is operational when the igni together tion is switched on Press and hold this button Keep the closing path clear Monitor closing and make sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is clear oth erwise injuries may result 50 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Opening and closing Controls Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children e g
29. gt Gray display adjust driving style e g by backing off the accelerator pedal The display switches to blue as soon as all conditions for fuel efficiency optimized driving are met ECO PRO tip driving tip The arrow indicates that the driving aw style can be adjusted to be more fuel efficient by backing off the accelerator for in stance Note The efficiency display and ECO PRO tips in the instrument cluster appear when the ECO PRO display is activated Activating driving style and ECO PRO tips 1 Settings 2 Instrument cluster 3 ECO PRO Info In the instrument display 1 Settings 2 Instrument cluster 3 Driving mode view ECO PRO tip symbols An additional symbol and text instructions are displayed Symbol Measure NY For efficient driving back off the ac celerator or delay accelerating to al low time to assess road conditions Reduce speed to the selected ECO N km h PRO speed Q20 Steptronic transmission shift from M S to D Indications on the Control Display EfficientDynamics Information on fuel consumption and technol ogy can be displayed while driving 1 Vehicle info 2 EfficientDynamics 195 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Driving tips Pkg Saving fuel Displaying fuel consumption history The average fuel consumption can be dis played within an adjustable time frame Vertical bars show consumption for the
30. ning lights 5 Side marker lights Light emitting diodes LEDs With LED headlights all front lights and side indicators are designed with LED technology If an LED fails switch on the front fog lights and continue the trip with great care Comply with local regulations Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction LED front fog lights These front fog lights are made using LED technology Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction Replacing components Tail lights bulb replacement At a glance Turn signal Reversing lamp Inside brake lamp Rear lamp a A WN Outside brake lamp Turn signal brake tail and license plate lights Follow general instructions refer to page 230 These lights feature LED technology Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction Lights in the trunk lid Follow general instructions refer to page 230 Access to the lights 1 Remove the three screws using the screw driver from the onboard vehicle tool kit 233 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Replacing components 2 Fold away the cover SS ________ 3 Replace the defective bulb Inside brake lamp 21 watt bulb H21W A Pull out the bulb and replace it Reversing lamp 16 watt bulb W16W 234 f Pull out the bulb and replace it Changing wheels Hints When using run flat tires or sealants a tire does n
31. refer to page 37 via remote control gt See also closing by means of Comfort Ac cess refer to page 43 Comfort position If the glass sunroof is not automatically com pletely opened the comfort position has been attained In this position the wind noises in the interior are the least If desired continue the movement by pressing the reel Pinch protection system If the closing force when closing the glass sun roof exceeds a certain value the closing move ment is stopped beginning at approximately the middle of the opening in the roof or from the tilted position during closing The glass sunroof reopens slightly Danger of jamming even with pinch pro tection Despite the pinch protection system check that the glass sunroof s closing path is clear otherwise the closing action may not be inter 51 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Opening and closing rupted in certain extreme situations such as when thin objects are present lt Press the reel up and hold it until the initialization is complete gt Initialization begins within 15 seconds and is com pleted when the glass sun roof and sliding visor are completely closed Closing from the open position without pinch protection E g if there is an external danger proceed as follows gt The glass sunroof closes without jam pro 1 Press the reel forward beyond the resist tection ance point
32. the door lock the alarm system is disarmed or armed at the same time Door lock and armed alarm system Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the alarm on some country specific versions Trunk lid and armed alarm system The trunk lid can be opened even when the alarm system is armed After the trunk lid is closed it is locked and monitored again when the doors are locked The hazard warning system flashes once Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation d Press button on the remote control for at least 3 seconds To switch off the alarm press any button Indicator lamp on the interior rearview mirror gt The indicator lamp flashes briefly every 2 seconds The system is armed gt The indicator lamp flashes after locking 47 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Opening and closing The doors hood or trunk lid is not closed properly but the rest of the vehicle is se cured After 10 seconds the indicator lamp flashes continuously Interior motion sen sor and tilt alarm sensor are not active When the still open access is closed inte rior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor will be switched on gt The indicator lamp goes out after unlock ing The vehicle has not been tampered with gt The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the engine ignition is switched on but no longer than approx 5 minute
33. ton decrease or increase the inten sity The selected intensity is shown on the display of the automatic climate control Air flow manual To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro gram first Press the left or right side of the but i ton decrease or increase air flow The selected air flow is shown on the display of the automatic climate control The air flow of the automatic climate control may be reduced automatically to save battery power Defrosts windows and removes condensation Press button Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Climate control Controls Ice and condensation are quickly removed from the windshield and the front side win dows For this purpose point the side vents onto the side windows as needed Adjust air flow with the program active If the windows are fogged over you can also switch on the cooling function or press the AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen Sor Maximum cooling Press button MAX A C The system is set to the lowest tem perature optimum air flow and air circulation mode Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re gion The vents need to be open for this The function is available above an external temperature of approx 32 F O C and with the engine running is indicated Adjust air flow with the program active Automatic recirculated air control recirculated air mode You may respond to unpl
34. 1 Mount the child restraint system refer to the user s manual of the system 2 Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop erly connected With comfort seats in the rear Assembly of LATCH child restraint systems 1 Before mounting adjust the seats to their basic position refer to page 58 2 For better accessibility tilt the backrest back slightly 3 Mount the child restraint system refer to the user s manual of the system 4 Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop erly connected 5 After mounting move the backrest back up slightly so that the child restraint system rests lightly against the backrest Child restraint fixing system with a tether strap Mounting points rx The respective symbol shows the an ile chor for the upper retaining strap Seats with an upper Top Tether are marked with this symbol It can be found on the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Transporting children safely Controls Note Mounting eyelets Use the mounting eyes only for the up per retaining strap to secure child restraint systems otherwise the mounting eyes could be damaged lt Retaining strap guide Retaining strap Make sure the upper retaining strap does not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it passes to the top anchor Otherwise the strap will not properly secure the child restraint system in the event of an accident lt 6
35. 15 Notes PO 11 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 ae Ataglance CELEUS Cockpit Cockpit Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and This chapter describes all standard country systems The respectively applicable country specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the series It also describes features that are not respective features and systems necessarily available in your car e g due to All around the steering wheel 1 Seating comfort features 5 Exterior mirror operation 64 Gentleman function 55 6 Driver assistance systems A Active Blind Spot Detec Seat mirror steering wheel KU tion 132 M memory 63 Intelligent Safety 117 JEN Active seat 55 Lane departure warning 130 7y 2 Roller sunblind for rear window 50 3 Safety switch for the windows and the roller sunblind in the rear 49 4 Power windows 48 14 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Cockpit Ataglance a glance Night Vision 127 D A Head up Display 102 gt N C Q Fr n Front fog lights 107 Parking lights 104 Low beams 104 IHE J m Automatic headlight con trol 105 Daytime running lights 105 Adaptive Light Control 105 High beam Assistant 106 Instrument lighting 107 Bo 8S O Q NA Cruise control ro
36. 4 ft 1 2 m gt Minimum depth approx 5 ft 1 5 m Regarding the parking procedure gt Doors and trunk lid closed gt Parking brake released gt When parking in parking spaces on the driver s side the corresponding turn signal must be set where applicable Overview Button in the vehicle Py Parking assistant 162 Ultrasound sensors O i al e C6 Na The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking spaces are located on the side of the vehicle To ensure full functionality gt Keep the sensors clean and free of ice gt When using high pressure washers do not spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in 3O cm gt Do not put stickers over sensors Switching on off Switching on with the button Py Press button The LED lights up The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display gy Parking assistant is activated automatically Switching on with the reverse gear Shift into reverse The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display To activate Parking Assistant Switch off The system can be deactivated as follows gt D Press button gt Switch off the ignition Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Driving comfort Controls Display on the Control Display System activated deactivated Symbol Meaning a Gray the system is not available Whit
37. 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Transporting children safely LATCH child restraint system LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil dren Note Follow manufacturer s information for LATCH child restraint systems To mount and use the LATCH child restraint systems observe the operating and safety in formation from the system manufacturer oth erwise the level of protection may be re duced lt Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child and CRS weight of 65 lb 30 kg when the child is restrained by the internal harnesses Note Properly engage the lower LATCH an chors Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have properly engaged and that the child restraint system is resting snugly against the backrest otherwise the degree of protection may be re duced lt Position The corresponding symbol shows the mounts for the lower LATCH anchors Seats equipped with lower anchors are marked with a pair 2 of LATCH sym isorix bols It is not recommended to use the inner lower anchors of standard outer LATCH positions to fasten a child restraint system on the middle seat Use the vehicle seat belt instead for the middle seat 70 Before installing LATCH child restraint systems Pull the belt away from the area of the child re straint system Without comfort seats in the rear Assembly of LATCH child restraint systems
38. 72 selector lever position P is engaged automatically P Park Select only when the vehicle is stationary The drive wheels are blocked P is engaged automatically gt After the engine is switched off when the vehicle is in radio ready state refer to page 72 or when the ignition is switched off refer to page 72 and when selector lever position R or D is set gt With the ignition off if selector lever posi tion N is set gt Ifthe driver s safety belt is released the driver s door is opened and the brake pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary and selector lever position D or R is set Before exiting the vehicle make sure that se lector lever position P is set Otherwise the ve hicle may begin to move Kickdown Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position Engaging selector lever positions Press on the brake pedal until you start driving To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a gear maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start gt Itis not possible to shift out of selector lever position P until the engine is running and the brake is applied gt With the vehicle is stationary press on the brake pedal before shifting out of P or N otherwise the shift command will not be executed shift lock Engaging D Rand N Briefly push the selecto
39. Blue lights High beams High beams are activated For additional information refer to High beams refer to page 80 General lamps Check Control At least one Check Control message is AN displayed or is stored The symbol is shown in the display of the instrument cluster Text messages Text messages in combination with a symbol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con trol message and the meaning of the indicator and warning lights Supplementary text messages Additional information such as on the cause of an error or the required action can be called up via Check Control With urgent messages the added text will be automatically displayed on the Control Display Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 11 15 Displays Controls Symbols Depending on the Check Control message the following functions can be selected gt Ji Owner s Manual Display additional information about the Check Control message in the Integrated Owner s Manual gt Service request Contact your service center gt Roadside Assistance Contact Roadside Assistance Hiding Check Control messages y Press the onboard computer button on the turn signal lever gt Some Check Control messages are dis played continuously and are not cleared until the malfunction is eliminated If sev eral malfunctions occur at once the mes sages are displayed consecutively These messages can be faded fo
40. Driving Dynamics Control refer to page 141 SPORT Sporty tuning for greater driving agility COMFORT Comfort oriented tuning for optimal comfort Dynamic Damping Control The concept This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav eling on uneven road surfaces The system enhances driving dynamics and comfort fitting road surface and driving style Programs The system offers several different programs Select the programs via the Driving Dynamics Control refer to page 141 SPORT SPORT Consistently sporty control of the shock ab sorbers for greater driving agility 139 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Driving stability control systems COMFORT ECO PRO Balanced tuning COMFORT Comfort oriented tuning of the shock absorb ers for optimal traveling comfort Integral Active Steering The concept Integral Active Steering is a combination of Ac tive Steering and rear axle steering Active Steering varies the steering angle of the wheels in relation to the steering wheel move ment as a function of the speed At speeds up to approx 37 mph 60 km h e g in curves the steering angle is increased i e steering becomes more direct The rear axle steering acts to increase maneu verability by turning the rear wheels slightly in a direction opposite to the front wheels At higher speeds the steering angle is increas
41. Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 3 Efficiency display 4 Transmission display In the ECO PRO program the instrument dis play switches to the ECO PRO displays These displays support a driving style that saves on 1 Speedometer 2 Tachometer 3 Transmission display In the Sport and Sport programs the instru ment display switches to the sport displays These displays support a sporty driving style with more prominent representation of the tachometer the transmission displays and the vehicle speed 5 gt Blue bonus range Gray range fuel consumption with more prominent repre sentation of the efficiency display and various ECO PRO tips 4 Shift lights when respectively equipped 5 Performance display 6 Variable displays The Check Control system monitors functions in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in the monitored systems A Check Control message is displayed as a combination of indicator or warning lights and text messages in the instrument cluster and in the Head up Display 89 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Displays In addition an acoustic signal may sound and a text message may appear on the Control Dis play Indicator warning lights General information The indicator and warning lights in the instru ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi nations and colors Several of the lights are checked for proper functioning an
42. Premise for the brake boos ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on the brake pedal The system can assist with some braking intervention if there is risk of a collision At low speeds vehicles may thus come to a complete stop The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti vated The braking intervention can be interrupted by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac tively moving the steering wheel Object detection can be restricted Limitations of the detection range and functional restric tions are to be considered System limits Detection range The detection potential of the camera is lim ited Thus a warning might not be issued or be is sued late E g the following situations may not be de tected gt Partially covered pedestrians gt Pedestrians that are not detected as such because of the viewing angle or contour gt Pedestrians outside of the detection range Pedestrians having a body size less than 32 in 80 cm Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional or may not be available in the following situations gt In heavy fog rain sprayed water or snow fall gt In tight curves Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Safety Controls gt If the driving stability control systems are deactivated e g DSC OFF gt Ifthe camera viewing field or the f
43. Press button on the remote con trol for approx 1 second As the case may be the doors are also un locked Opening with the remote control refer to page 38 gt Push the button in the driver s footwell Pressing the button again stops the motion The opening procedure is likewise interrupted gt When starting the engine gt When the vehicle starts moving gt By pressing the button in the driver s foot well gt By pressing the button on the inside of the trunk lid Provide edge protection Sharp objects or those with edges can hit the rear window while driving and damage the heat conductors of the rear window Pro vide edge protection lt Closing Without Comfort Access 42 gt Press button on the inside of the trunk lid The trunk lid closes automatically Pressing the button again stops the mo tion With Comfort Access a ff ed ak rat gt Press button arrow 1 on the inside of the trunk lid Pressing the button again stops the mo tion gt Press button arrow 2 The vehicle will be locked after closing the tailgate The driver s door must be closed for this purpose and the remote control must be outside of the vehicle in the area of the trunk lid Pressing the button again stops the mo tion Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Opening and closing Controls gt Press button on the exterior of the trunk lid Pressing the button ag
44. Press button repeatedly to select a mae program Upper body region Upper body region and footwell Footwell Windows and footwell Windows upper body region and footwell VV VV VV Windows driver s side only gt Windows and upper body region If the windows are fogged over press the AUTO button on the driver s side to utilize the condensation sensor Temperature The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as quickly as possible if needed by using the maximum cooling or heating li dacity and then keeps it constant Turn the ring to set the desired temperature Do not rapidly switch between different tem perature settings Otherwise the automatic cli mate control will not have sufficient time to ad just the set temperature 166 AUTO program AUTO Press button Air flow air distribution and tempera ture are controlled automatically Depending on the selected temperature AUTO intensity program and outside influen ces the air is directed to the windshield side windows upper body and into the footwell The cooling function refer to page 167 is switched on automatically with the AUTO pro gram At the same time a condensation sensor con trols the program so as to prevent window condensation as much as possible Intensity of the AUTO program With the AUTO program activated the auto matic intensity control can be changed Press the left or right side of the but
45. Regardless of the remote control in use a dif ferent profile may be activated 1 Settings 2 Profiles 3 Select a profile gt All settings stored in the called up profile are automatically applied gt The called up profile is assigned to the re mote control being used at the time gt If the profile is already assigned to a differ ent remote control this profile will apply to both remote controls It cannot be differen tiated anymore between the settings for the two remote controls Renaming profiles A personal name can be assigned to every pro file to avoid confusion between the profiles 1 Settings 2 Profiles 3 Options 4 Rename current profile Resetting profiles The settings of the active profile are reset to their default values 1 Settings 2 Profiles 3 Options 4 Reset current profile Exporting profiles Most settings of the active profile can be ex ported This can be helpful for securing and retrieving personal settings before delivering the vehicle to a workshop e g Profiles can be taken to an Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Opening and closing Controls other vehicle equipped with the Personal Pro file function The following export options are available gt Via BMW Online gt Via the USB port to a USB device Popular file systems for USB devices are supported FAT32 and exFAT are the rec ommended formats for profile
46. Replace the cover after use Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after use otherwise objects may get into the lighter socket or fixture and cause a short circuit lt Sockets General information The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment while the engine is run ning or when the ignition is switched on Note The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable connectors Front center console Press on the cover Remove the cover or cigarette lighter 176 Socket is located below the glove compart ment To access the socket fold open the cover Rear center console Remove the cover or cigarette lighter USB interface for data transfer The concept Connection for importing and exporting data on USB devices e g gt Personal Profile settings refer to page 35 gt Music collection see user s manual for Navigation Entertainment and Communi cation Hints Observe the following when connecting gt Do not use force when plugging the con nector into the USB interface Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Interior equipment gt Do not connect devices such as fans or lights to the USB interface gt Donotconnect USB hard drives Do not use the USB interface for recharg ing external devices With navigation system Professional or TV at a glance 1 The USB i
47. State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other repro ductive harm Battery posts terminals and re lated accessories contain lead and lead com pounds Wash your hands after handling Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly Your vehicle is covered by the fol lowing warranties gt New Vehicle Limited Warranty gt Rust Perforation Limited Warranty gt Federal Emissions System Defect War ranty Federal Emissions Performance Warranty gt California Emission Control System Lim ited Warranty Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating con ditions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to de liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or region you may be required to adapt your ve hicle to meet different prevailing operating conditions and homologation requirements You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limitations or exclusions for such count
48. The variable green pathway line assists you in assessing the amount of space ac tually needed to the side of the vehicle The lane line depends on the engaged gear and the current steering angle The Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Driving comfort Controls track line is continuously adjusted for the steering wheel movement Parking aid lines Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed System limits Top View cannot be used in the following sit uations gt With a door open gt With the trunk lid open gt With an exterior mirror folded in gt In poor light A Check Control message is displayed in some of these situations Parking assistant The concept a This system assists the driver in parking paral lel to the road Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle The parking assistant calculates the best pos sible parking line and takes control of steering during the parking procedure When parking also take note of the visual and acoustic information and instructions issued by the PDC the parking assistant and the rear view camera and react accordingly A component of the parking assistant is the PDC Park Distance Control refer to page 153 Hints Personal responsibility Even an active system does not relieve the driver from personal responsibility while driving Technically the system has its limits it cannot indepe
49. US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Please consult your Service and Warranty In formation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod els for additional information on service re quirements Maintenance and repair should be performed by your service center Make sure to have reg ular maintenance procedures recorded in the vehicle s Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod els These entries are proof of regular mainte nance Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Maintenance Mobility Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis Note Socket for Onboard Diagnosis The socket for onboard diagnostics may only be used by the service center or a work shop that operates in accordance with the specifications of the vehicle manufacturer with correspondingly trained personnel and other authorized persons Otherwise use may result in operating problems for the vehicle lt Position There is an OBD socket on the driver s side for checking the primary components in the vehi cle s emissions Emissions gt The warning lamp lights up Emissions are deteriorating Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible gt The warning lamp flashes under certain circumstances This indicates that there is excessive mis firing in the engine Reduce the vehicle speed and h
50. Your service specialist can read the current service requirements from your remote con trol Display Data regarding the service status or legally mandated vehicle inspections are automati cally transmitted to your service center before a service due date Detailed information on service requirements More information on the scope of service re quired can be displayed on the Control Dis play On the Control Display 1 Vehicle info 2 Vehicle status 3 Go Service required Required maintenance procedures and le gally mandated inspections are displayed 4 Select an entry to call up detailed informa tion 95 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Displays Symbols Sym Description bols No service is currently required The deadline for scheduled mainte nance or a legally mandated inspec tion is approaching The service deadline has already passed BRE Entering appointment dates Enter the dates for the required inspections Make sure that the vehicle s date and time are set correctly On the Control Display Vehicle info Vehicle status L Service required Vehicle inspection Date Adjust the settings eS ee YS Confirm The entered date is stored Automatic Service Request Data regarding the service status or legally mandated vehicle inspections are automati cally transmitted to your service center before a service due date
51. active head restraint automat ically reduces the distance from the head Reduced protective function gt Do not use seat or head restraint covers gt Do not hang objects e g clothes hangers on the head restraints gt Only attach accessories approved by BMW to the seat or head restraint Otherwise the protective function of the active head restraint will be impaired and the per sonal safety of the occupants will be endan gered lt Wear and tear after accidents or when dam aged otherwise Have the active headrest checked and if needed replaced Adjusting the height Adjusting electrically Distance to the back of the head electrical head restraints The head restraint is automatically reposi tioned when the shoulder support is adjusted neem the side extensions Fy eet e N Fold forward for increased lateral support in the resting position Removing The head restraints cannot be removed Rear head restraints Correctly adjusted head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident Adjusting the head restraint Adjust the head restraints of all occupied seats properly otherwise there is an increased risk of injury in an accident Height Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approximately at ear level Distance Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close a
52. add washer fluid when the engine is cool and then close the cover completely to avoid contact between the washer fluid and hot engine parts Otherwise there is a danger of fire and a risk to personal safety if the fluid is spilled Washer fluid reservoir All washer nozzles are supplied from one res ervolr Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con centrate and tap water and if required with a washer antifreeze according to the manufac turer s recommendations Mix the washer fluid before adding to find the right mixture Do not add windshield washer concentrate and antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure water this could damage the wiper system Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif ferent manufacturers because they can clog the windshield washer nozzles Recommended minimum fill quantity 0 2 US gal 1 liter Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Driving Controls Steptronic transmission Selector lever positions D Drive Selector lever position for normal vehicle oper ation All gears for forward travel are activated automatically To reduce fuel consumption the engine is au tomatically decoupled from the transmission under the conditions described for Coasting refer to page 196 R is Reverse Select only when the vehicle is stationary N Neutral The vehicle may roll Use in automatic car washes e g When the ignition is switched off refer to page
53. and hold The pinch protection is limited and the glass sunroof reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain margin 2 Press the reel forward again beyond the re sistance point and hold until the glass sun roof closes without jam protection Make sure that the closing area is clear Closing from the raised position without pinch protection If there is an external danger push the reel for ward past the resistance point and hold it The glass sunroof closes without jam protec tion Initializing after a power failure After a power failure during the opening or closing process the glass sunroof can only be operated to a limited extent Initializing the system The system can be initialized when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running During the initialization the glass sunroof closes without jam protection Keep the closing path clear Monitor closing and make sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is clear oth erwise injuries may result lt 52 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Adjusting Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisio
54. and to other traffic never attempt to use the controls or enter information unless traffic and road conditions allow it lt Control elements at a glance Control elements SEET 1 Control Display 2 Controller with buttons and depending on the equipment version with touchpad 18 Control Display Hints gt To clean the Control Display follow the care instructions gt Do not place objects close to the Control Display otherwise the Control Display can be damaged gt In the case of very high temperatures on the Control Display e g due to intense so lar radiation the brightness may be re duced down to complete deactivation Once the temperature is reduced e g through shadow or climate control system the normal functions are re established Switching on 1 Switch on the ignition 2 Press the controller Switch off Press button 2 Turn off control display of Options EY Split screen Tum off control display Profile settings Display Owner s Manual Reset current profile Rename current profile Controller The buttons can be used to open the menus directly The controller can be used to select menu items and enter the settings Some iDrive functions can be operated using the touchpad on the controller Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 iDrive Ataglance a glance BACK Displays the previous panel OPTION Opens the Options menu Operating
55. be damaged lt Before driving into a car wash In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll ina car wash take the following steps 1 Drive into the car wash 2 Engage selector lever position N Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Care Mobility 3 Deactivating Automatic Hold refer to page 4 Release the parking brake 5 Switch the engine off In this way the ignition remains switched on and a Check Control message is dis played Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash otherwise selector lever position P is en gaged and damages can result lt The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside when in selector lever position N A signal sounds when an attempt is made to lock the vehicle To start the engine 1 Depress the brake pedal 2 Press the Start Stop button Pressing the Start Stop button without step ping on the brake turns the ignition off Selector lever position Selector lever position P is engaged automati cally gt When the ignition is switched off gt After approx 15 minutes Headlights gt Donotrub dry and do not use abrasive or acidic cleansers gt Soak areas that have been dirtied e g from insects with shampoo and wash off with water gt Thaw ice with de icing spray do not use an ice scraper After washing the vehicle After washing the vehicle apply the brakes briefly to
56. bodywork of the two vehicles other wise there is a danger of short circuits lt 1 Check whether the battery of the other ve hicle has a voltage of 12 volts This infor mation can be found on the battery 2 Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi cle 3 Switch off any electronic systems power consumers in both vehicles Starting aid terminals Connecting order Connect the jumper cables in the correct order to prevent risk of injury from arcing lt The so called starting aid terminal in the en gine compartment acts as the battery s posi tive terminal The body ground or a special nut acts as the battery negative terminal Connecting the cables 1 Pull off the lid of the BMW starting aid ter minal Attach one terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis tance Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of the cable to the positive terminal of the battery or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be started Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery or to the corresponding engine or body ground of assisting vehicle Attach the second terminal clamp to the negative terminal of the battery or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started Starting the engine Never use sp
57. disc corrosion and contamination of the brake pads are favored by gt Low mileage gt Extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all gt Infrequent use of the brakes Corrosion will built up when the maximum pressure applied to the brake pads during braking Is not reached thus discs don t get cleaned Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re sponse generally that cannot be corrected Condensation under the parked vehicle When using the automatic climate control condensation water develops collecting under neath the vehicle These traces of water under the vehicle are normal Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Loading Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Hints Overloading the vehicle To avoid exceeding the approved ca pacity of the tires never overload the vehicle Overloading can lead to overheating and in creases the rate at which damage develops in side the tires This could result in a sudden loss of tire inflation pres
58. distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on cargo load driv ing style and road conditions A vehicle with an average load has a possible driving range of approx 50 miles 80 km A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ ently e g it has reduced lane stability during braking a longer braking distance and different self steering properties Adjust your driving style accordingly Avoid abrupt steering ma 116 neuvers or driving over obstacles e g curbs potholes etc Because the possible driving distance de pends on how the vehicle is used during the trip the actual distance may be shorter or lon ger depending on the driving speed road con ditions external temperature cargo load etc Continued driving with a flat tire Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph 80 km h Your car handles differently when you lose tire inflation pressure e g your lane stability is re duced when braking braking distances are longer and the self steering properties will change Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of a tire Reduce speed and stop otherwise pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident Do not continue driving and contact your service center Required tire inflation pressure check message A Check Control message is displayed in the following situations gt Thesystem has detected a wheel change but no r
59. dry them otherwise braking action can be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can occur Completely remove all residues on the win dows to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear Vehicle care Car care products BMW recommends using care and cleaning products from BMW since these have been tested and approved Car care and cleaning products Follow the instructions on the container When cleaning the interior open the doors or windows Only use products intended for cleaning vehi cles Cleansers can contain substances that are dangerous and harmful to your health lt Vehicle paint Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention Environmental influences in areas with elevated air pollution or natural con taminants such as tree resin or pollen can af fect the vehicle s paintwork Tailor the fre quency and extent of your car care to these influences Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel oil grease or bird droppings must be removed im mediately to prevent the finish from being al tered or discolored Only use respectively approved cleaning and care products for vehicles with matte finish Suitable care products for matte finishes are available from the service center Leather care Remove dust from the leather often using a cloth or vacuum cleaner 243 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Mobil
60. export Other formats may not support the export Settings Profiles Export profile BMW Online BMW Online USB interface USB device mop e Importing profiles Profiles exported via BMW Online can also be imported via BMW Online Profiles stored on a USB device can be im ported via the USB interface Existing settings are overwritten with the im ported profile 1 Settings 2 Profiles 3 Import profile 4 BMW Online BMW Online USB interface USB device Using the guest profile The guest profile is for individual settings that are saved in none of the three personal pro files This can be useful for drivers who are using the vehicle temporarily and do not have their own profile 1 Settings 2 Profiles 3 Guest The guest profile cannot be renamed It is not assigned to the current remote control Display profile list during start The profile list can be displayed during each start to select the desired profile Settings Profiles Options S YS Display user list at startup Using the remote control Note Take the remote control with you People or animals left unattended in a parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in side Always take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside lt Unlocking Press button on the remote control gt All doors the tailgate and the fuel filler flap
61. from the dis Or play in the instrument cluster Blue bar segments symbolize the gained bo 1 Settings nus range in stages i In addition the bonus range is highlighted in 3 Configure ECO PRO blue in the total range display Configure the program ECO PRO bonus range ECO iiis Tip An adjusted driving style helps gt Tip ats you extend your driving range gt gt i 45 8 mi Adjust the ECO PRO speed This may be displayed as the gt ECO PRO speed warning bonus range in the instrument The output is reduced once the set ECO cluster PRO speed is reached The bonus range is shown in the range display The bonus range is automatically reset every Coasting time the vehicle is refueled Fuel efficiency can be optimized by disengag ing the engine and Coasting refer to page 196 with the engine idling 194 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Saving fuel Drivingtips tips Efficiency display Display in the instrument cluster D ECO PRO p OWER Ci 4 FRG Display in the instrument display A mark in the efficiency display informs about the current driving style Mark in the area of arrow 1 display of the en ergy recovered by coasting or when braking Mark in the area of arrow 2 display when ac celerating Your driving style s efficiency is shown by the bar s color gt Blue display efficient driving style as long as the mark moves within the blue range
62. in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure If necessary have the vehicle towed lt RSC Run flat tires Run flat tires refer to page 216 are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the sidewall M S Winter and all season tires with better cold weather performance than summer tires 213 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Mobility Wheels and tires Tire tread Summer tires Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0 12 in 3 mm There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if the tire tread depth is less than 0 12 in 3 mm Winter tires Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0 16 in 4 mm Below a tread depth of 0 16 in 4 mm tires are less suitable for winter operation Minimum tread depth Wear indicators are distributed around the tire s circumference and have the legally re quired minimum height of 0 063 in 1 6 mm They are marked on the side of the tire with TWI Tread Wear Indicator Tire damage General information Inspect your tires often for damage foreign objects lodged in the tread and tread wear Hints Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces as well as debris curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels tires and suspension parts This is more likely to occur with low profile tires which provide less cush 214 ioning between the wheel and the road Be careful
63. in the handle of the tail gate The image quality may be impaired by dirt Lanes and turning radius are indicated Clean the camera lens refer to page 245 gt Obstacle marking Pa Obstacle marking Switching on off Spatially shaped markings are displayed Switching on automatically Pathway lines With the engine running engage lever in posi tion PR The rearview camera image is displayed if the system was switched on via the iDrive Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded gt Pathway lines can be superimposed on the image of the rearview camera Switch the system back on if needed Switching on off manually gt They help you to estimate how much space is needed when parking and maneu PY PLGSs BULON vering on level pavement gt On the LED lights up gt They are dependent on the current steer ing angle and are continuously adjusted to gt Off the LED goes out the steering wheel movements The PDC is shown on the Control Display Switching the view via iDrive With PDC activated or Top View switched on eR Rear view camera The rearview camera image is displayed 156 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Driving comfort Controls Turning circle lines gt Turning circle lines can only be superim posed on the rearview camera image to gether with pathway lines gt They show the cou
64. independent of each other gt Attentiveness assistant 133 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Safety gt PreCrash gt PostCrash Attentiveness assistant The concept The system can detect increasing lack of alert ness or fatigue of the driver during long mo notonous journeys e g on highways In this situation it is recommended that the driver takes a break Note Personal responsibility The system cannot act as a substitute for the personal assessment of one s physical state and may not detect an increasing lack of alertness or fatigue or may not detect it cor rectly Therefore make sure that the driver is rested and alert otherwise risks may be de tected too late and an accident be caused as a result lt Function The system is activated each time the engine is started and cannot be switched off After travel has begun the system is trained about the driver so that increasing lack of alertness or fatigue can be detected This procedure takes the following criteria into account gt Personal driving style e g steering behav ior gt Driving conditions e g length of trip Starting at approximately 43 mph 70 km h the system Is active and can display a recommen dation to take a break Break recommendation If the driver becomes increasingly less alert or fatigued a message is displayed in the Control Display with the recommendation to take a brea
65. is displayed Check the coolant level refer to page 226 Odometer and trip odometer Display gt Odometer arrow 1 Sb lt b gt Trip odometer arrow 2 43955 223 5 Show reset kilometers Press the knob D gt When the ignition is lt switched off the time the a external temperature and the odometer are displayed gt When the ignition is switched on the trip odometer is reset External temperature If the indicator drops to 37 F 3 C or lower a signal sounds A Check Control message is displayed There is an increased risk of ice on roads Ice on roads Even at temperatures above 37 F 3 C roads might be icy 94 Therefore drive carefully on bridges and shaded roads e g to avoid the increased risk of an accident lt Time The time is displayed at the bot tom of the instrument cluster 08 35 am Setting the time and time for mat refer to page 100 Date The date is displayed in the oR kkrk computer Setting the date and date for mat refer to page 101 Range Display With a low remaining range gt A Check Control message is displayed briefly gt The remaining range is shown on the on board co mupter gt With a dynamic driving style e g taking curves aggressively engine operation might vary The Check Control message appears continu ously below a range of approx 30 miles 50 km Refuel promptly Refuel no
66. later than at a range of 30 miles 50 km or engine operation might fail and damage might occur Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Displays Controls Displaying the cruising range Depending on your vehicle s optional features the range can also be displayed as bar in the instrument cluster 1 Settings 2 Instrument cluster 3 Additional indicators With navigation system range with destination guidance active YO If respective equipment is fitted By and destination guidance is ac tive the remaining range is dis played when the destination is reached Current fuel consumption Display Depending on your vehicle s op _ tional features the current fuel consumption can be displayed in the instrument cluster Check whether you are currently driv ing in an efficient and environmentally friendly manner Displaying the current fuel consumption 1 Settings 2 Instrument cluster 3 Additional indicators The bar display for the current fuel consump tion is displayed in the instrument cluster Energy recovery Display The kinetic energy of the vehicle _ is converted to electrical energy while coasting The vehicle bat tery is partially charged and fuel consumption can be reduced Service requirements The concept After the ignition is turned on the instrument cluster briefly displays available driving dis tance or time to the next scheduled mainte nance
67. leg room in the rear e g 1 Press button to activate the function ar row 2 Adjust the passenger seat e g forward back 3 Press button to deactivate the function ar row The function deactivates itself automatically after some time Reset to standard position Maintain pressure on the button until the sys tem completes the adjustment Massage function in rear seats Wavelike motions from the top to the bottom in the backrest relax back muscles 58 Button in rear Switching on is To switch on press the button once for each massage level The highest level is active when two LEDs are lit Switch off To switch off press and hold the button The LEDs go out Rear seat heating Switching on al The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit If the journey is continued within approx 15 minutes the seat heating is activated automat ically with the temperature selected last When ECO PRO refer to page 193 is acti vated the heater output is reduced Press button once for each tempera ture level Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Adjusting Controls Switch off Press button longer The LEDs go out Temperature distribution The heating action in the seat cushion and backrest can be distributed in different ways On the Control Display Climate Rear seat heating Select the required seat oY YY SS Turn th
68. must be observed when using the respective features and systems Start Stop button The concept Pressing the Start Stop button switches the ignition on or off and starts the engine The engine starts with the brake pedal pressed when you press the Start Stop button Ignition on Press the Start Stop button and do not press on the brake pedal at the same time All vehicle systems are ready for operation Most of the indicator and warning lights in the instrument cluster light up for a varied length of time To save battery power when the engine is off switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems power consumers Ignition off Press the Start Stop button again without stepping on the brake All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go out 72 To save battery power when the engine is off switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems power consumers P when the ignition is switched off P is engaged automatically when the ig nition is switched off When in an automatic car wash e g ensure that the ignition is not switched off accidentally The ignition automatically cuts off while the vehicle is stationary and the engine is stopped gt When locking the vehicle and when the low beams are activated gt Shortly before the battery is discharged completely so that the engine can still be started This function is only available when the low beams are turned
69. navigation sys tem gt When roads differ from the navigation such as due to changes in road routing gt When passing buses or trucks with a speed sticker gt If the traffic signs are non conforming During calibration of the camera immedi ately after vehicle shipment 97 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Displays Selection lists in the instrument cluster The concept Depending on your vehicle s optional features the following can be displayed or operated us ing the buttons and the thumbwheel on the steering wheel as well as the displays in the in strument cluster and the Head up Display gt Current audio source gt Redial phone feature gt Turn on voice activation system Display No One But You V Rock n Roll Boy Shine A Light Depending on your vehicle s optional features the list in the instrument cluster can differ from the illustration shown Activating a list and adjusting the setting On the right side of the steering wheel turn the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding list 98 Using the thumbwheel select the desired set ting and confirm it by pushing the thumbwheel On board computer Indication in the info display The information from the com puter is shown in the info display in the instrument cluster Calling up information on the info display Press the onboard computer button on the turn signal lever
70. numbers Symbol Function ABc Enter the letters 124 Enter the numbers abc or ABC Tip controller up Without navigation system A amp Select the symbol Entry comparison Entering names and addresses choice is nar rowed down with every letter entered and let ters may be added automatically Entries are continuously compared with data stored in the vehicle gt Only those letters are offered during input for which data is available Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 iDrive Ataglance a glance gt Target search names of locations may be entered in languages available through Control Display 25 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Ataglance Feeirlia me Voice activation system Voice activation system Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems The concept gt Most functions displayed on the Control Display can be operated by voice com mands via the voice activation system The system supports you with announcements during input gt Functions that can only be used when
71. opened Display of an opened menu When selecting a menu it generally opens with the panel that was last selected in that menu To display the first panel of a menu gt Move the controller to the left repeatedly until the first panel is displayed gt Press the menu button on the controller twice Opening the Options menu Press button The Options menu is displayed 20 t Options LY Split screen Turn off control display FM Display Owner s Manual QO HD Radio reception O RDS Radio Additional options move the controller to the right repeatedly until the Options menu is displayed Options menu The Options menu consists of various areas gt Screen settings e g Split screen This area remains unchanged gt Control options for the selected main menu e g for Radio gt If applicable further operating options for the selected menu e g Store station Changing settings 1 Select a field 2 Turn the controller until the desired setting is displayed Volume settings Speed volume Volume setting PDC m Gong 3 Press the controller Activating deactivating the functions Several menu items are preceded by a check box It indicates whether the function is acti vated or deactivated Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function EY Function is activated Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 iDrive Ataglance
72. out loud for you Voice commands E g if the Settings menu is displayed the commands for the settings are read out loud Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Voice activation system Ataglance a glance Executing functions using short commands Execute functions on the main menu via short commands It almost doesn t matter which menu item is selected e g Vehicle status List of short commands for the voice activation system see Navigation Entertainment Com munication Owner s Manual Help dialog for the voice activation system Calling up help dialog Help lt Additional commands for the help dialog gt Help with examples announces informa tion about the current operating options and the most important commands for them gt Help with voice activation information about the principle of operation for the voice activation system is announced One example open the tone settings Via the main menu The commands of the menu items are spoken just as they are selected via the controller 1 Turn on the Entertainment sound output if needed 2 Gs Press button on the steering wheel 3 Radios 4 Tone Via short command The desired tone settings can also be started via a short command 1 Turn on the Entertainment sound output if needed 2 Gi Press button on the steering wheel 3 Tone Setting the voice dialog Set system to standard dialog or use a sh
73. properly At page 61 under the heading Active head restraint the paragraph beginning Only attach accessories should be dis regarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof BMW recommends that you attach accessories approved by BMW to the seat or head restraint At page 63 under the heading Removing electrical head restraints the paragraph beginning To avoid damage should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that they be installed by a service center At page 78 under the heading Have the malfunction corrected the text should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof If the parking brake has been released man ually in response to a malfunction it is strongly recommended that a technician return it to operation and that you have the malfunction corrected at your BMW Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Addendum 10 12 13 14 dealer s service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accor dance with BMW specifications At page 103 under the heading Special windshield the paragraph beginning Therefore have the special windshield should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu
74. reducing agent yourself in exceptional cases e g to get to the service center Avoid contact with Diesel exhaust fluid Do not come into contact with the reduc ing agent Otherwise skin or eye irritations may result lt Handling Diesel exhaust fluid When working with reducing agent in closed spaces ensure good ventilation When the bottle or container is opened acrid smell ing fumes may eslide lt Keeping Diesel exhaust fluid out of reach of children Keep reducing agent out of reach of children Avoid contact with surfaces Avoid contact of reduction agent with surfaces of the vehicle otherwise damage could occur lt Suitable Diesel exhaust fluid gt Preferred BMW Diesel Exhaust Fluid With this bottle and its special adapter Diesel Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Fuel Mobility exhaust fluid can be replenished simply 4 Place the bottle on it and turn it as far as it and safely will go see arrow gt Alternative NOx reduction agent AUS 32 Diesel exhaust fluid can be purchased at your service center Refill quantity When the Reserve display starts add at least 3 bottles of reducing agent This corresponds to approx 1 5 US gal 6 liters Tank for reducing agent 5 Press the bottle down see arrow i F The vehicle tank will be filled The tank is full when the fill level in the bot tle no longer changes It is not possible to overfill A The
75. specific driving and operating modes Driving tips eka Things to remember when driving Things to remember when driving Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Breaking in period General information Moving parts need time to adjust to one an other break in time The following instructions will help accomplish a long vehicle life and good efficiency Engine transmission and axle drive Up to 1 200 miles 2 000 km Do not exceed the maximum engine and road speed gt For gasoline engine 4 500 rpm and 100 mph 160 km h gt For diesel engine 3 500 rom and 93 mph 150 km h Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum stances From 1 200 miles 2 000 km The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased Tires Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur ing circumstances when tires are brand new 186 they achieve their full traction potential after a break in time Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles 300 km Brake system Brakes require an initial break in period of ap prox 300 mil
76. speed the system is active The marking lights up or ange the system has been interrupted gt The marking does not light up the system is switched off With instrument display the symbol is Er displayed in the soeedometer similarly to the mark for the desired speed Brief status display r aa Selected desired speed 09 If appears briefly on the display for Check Control messages it is possible that the sys tem requirements are currently not ready for operations Distance to vehicle ahead of you Shown is selected distance to the vehicle driv ing ahead of you Distance display Distance 1 Distance 2 Distance 3 Distance 4 This value is set after the system is switched on 148 gt The marking lights up green Distance display The system has been interrupted or distance control is temporarily sup pressed because the accelerator pedal is being pressed a vehicle was not detected Distance control is temporarily sup pressed because the accelerator pedal is being pressed a vehicle was detected Rolling bars the detected vehicle has driven away ACC is no longer accelerating To accelerate further activate ACC by briefly stepping on the accelerator pedal pressing the RES but ton or rocker switch Indicator warning lights Personal responsibility The indicator and warning lights do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her desired driving s
77. speed Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set If active the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear gt Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the point of resistance the desired speed 152 increases or decreases by approx 1 mph km gt Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the point of resistance the desired speed increases or decreases by a maxi mum of 5 mph 10 km h The maximum speed that can be set de pends on the vehicle gt Pressing the rocker switch to the resist ance point and holding it accelerates or de celerates the vehicle without requiring pressure on the accelerator pedal After the rocker switch is released the ve hicle maintains its final speed Pressing the switch beyond the resistance point causes the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly Resuming the desired speed Press button The stored speed is reached and maintained Displays in the instrument cluster Indicator lamp s Depending on how the vehicle is equip A ped the indicator lamp in the instru ment cluster indicates whether the sys tem is switched on Desired speed gt The marking lights up green a the system is active 60 gt The marking does not light up the system is switched off The marking lights up or ange the system has been interrupted With instrument display the symbol is dis
78. speed is reduced slightly although curves can not be anticipated in advance Therefore drive into a curve at an appropriate speed This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions gt This device may not cause harmful inter In tight curves the system offers only restricted g y y ference and detection where a vehicle ahead of you might be detected late or not at all gt this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Malfunction The system cannot be activated if the radar sensor is not aligned correctly This may be caused by damage incurred during parking When you approach a curve the system may e g briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the bend of the curve If the system deceler ates you may compensate it by briefly acceler ating A Check Control message is displayed if the system fails The function for detecting and responding when approaching stationary vehicles may be After releasing the gas pedal the system is re limited in the following situations activated and controls speed independently gt During calibration of the camera immedi ately after vehicle shipment Driving away gt If the camera is malfunctioning or dirty A In some situations
79. than they appear Do not estimate the distance from the objects on the display Side View The concept Side View provides an early look at cross traffic at blind driveways and intersections Road users concealed by obstacles to the left and right of the vehicle can only be detected rela tively late from the driver s seat To improve visibility two cameras in the front of the vehi cle record the traffic situation on each side Hints The images from both cameras are shown si multaneously on the Control Display Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve hicle on blind driveways and intersections with your own eyes Otherwise an accident could result from road users or objects located out side the picture area of the Side View cam eras 158 At a glance Button in the vehicle o Side View Cameras Two cameras integrated in the bumpers cap ture the image The two camera lenses are located on the sides of the bumper The image quality may be impaired by dirt Clean the camera lenses refer to page 245 Switching on off Switching on off manually o Press button Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Driving comfort Controls Switch the system back on if needed Display The traffic area to the left and right i
80. that minimizes nitrogen oxides The vehicle has a tank that can be refilled To be able to start the engine as usual there must be an adequate reducing agent Reducing agent is added by the service center Warming up the system In order to warm the engine up to its operating temperature after a cold start the Steptronic transmission may subsequently shift up to the next higher gear Displays in the instrument cluster Reserve indication This display in the instrument cluster provides information about the distance that can still be driven with the current reserve level gt Lamp white refill with re duction agent at the next opportunity gt Lamp yellow not enough re duction agent present The remaining range is displayed in the instrument cluster Im mediately refill with reduc tion agent refer to page 204 203 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Mobility Fuel Diesel exhaust fluid on minimum gt The remaining range is dis played in the instrument cluster refill with reduction agent The engine will con tinue to run as long as it Is not switched off and all other operating conditions are Satisfied sufficient fuel e g Engine does not start Do not continue driving to the limit of the remaining travel distance Otherwise you will not be able to restart the engine after switch ing It off In certain cases this could cause safety to be impaired Filling wit
81. the accuracy of this function over the long term Calibrating the front seats A corresponding message appears on the Control Display 1 Press the reel and move the respective seat all the way forward 2 Press the reel forward again The seat still moves forward slightly 3 Readjust the seat to the desired position The calibration procedure is completed when the message on the Control Display disap pears If the message continues to be displayed re peat the calibration If the message does not disappear after a re peat calibration have the system checked as soon as possible Unobstructed area of movement Ensure that the area of movement of the seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury or damage to objects 112 FTM Flat Tire Monitor The concept The system detects tire inflation pressure loss on the basis of rotation speed differences be tween the individual wheels while driving In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corresponding wheel changes This will be detected and reported as a flat tire The system does not measure the actual infla tion pressure in the tires Functional requirements The system must have been initialized when the tire inflation pressure was correct other wise reliable flagging of a flat tire is not as sured Initialize the system after each correc tion of the tire inflation pressure and after ev
82. the seat in question Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 1 Raise the head restraint up against the re sistance 2 Press button arrow 1 and pull the head re straint out completely Before transporting passengers Reinstall the head restraint before trans porting anyone in the seat otherwise the pro tective function of the head restraint is unavail able Removing electrical head restraints Note Do not remove the rear head restraints To avoid damage they may only be installed by your service center Removing Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question 1 Completely raise the head restraint 2 Completely pull out the head restraint with a firm tug Before transporting passengers Reinstall the head restraint before trans porting anyone in the seat otherwise the pro tective function of the head restraint is unavail able Adjusting Seat mirror and steering wheel memory The concept Two driver s seat and exterior mirror positions can be stored per profile refer to page 35 and called up Settings for the backrest width and lumbar support are not stored in memory Hints Do not retrieve the memory while driving Do not retrieve the memory setting while driving as an unexpected movement of the seat or steering wheel could result in an acci dent lt Keep the movement area unobstructed When changing the seat position keep t
83. the system on off Switch off Press and hold the left button Switching on Press any button except gt Left side of Air volume button gt Seat heating gt Seat ventilation Maximum cooling Press button MAX A C The system is set to the lowest tem perature maximum air flow and air circulation mode Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re gion The vents need to be open for this Air is cooled as quickly as possible gt At an external temperature of approx 32 FIO C Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Climate control Controls gt When the engine is running Climate control operation on the roofliner Temperature Turn the ring to set the desired temperature Air flow p Pa Press the left or right side of the but i ton decrease or increase air flow LEDs indicate the intensity of the air supply The air flow may be reduced automatically to save battery power Ventilation Thumbwheel for changing the air flow direc tion arrow Parked car ventilation The concept The parked car ventilation ventilates the vehi cle interior and lowers its temperature if needed Operation can be performed via iDrive Functional requirements Parked car ventilation gt Using the preset reel on time or when op erated directly any external temperature Open the vents to allow air to flow out Switching on off directly On the Control Disp
84. thereof BMW recommends that you have the special windshield replaced by the service center At page 188 under the heading Objects within the range of movement of the ped als and at page 245 under the heading Carpets and floor mats the paragraph that begins Only use floor mats should be disregarded and the following language should be read in lieu thereof The manu facturer of your vehicle recommends that you use floor mats that have been identified by it as appropriate for use in your vehicle and that can be properly fixed in place At page 193 under the heading Have maintenance carried out the sentence beginning The maintenance should be carried out should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof BMW recommends that you have the maintenance carried out by your service center At page 207 under the heading Tire infla tion specifications the sentence begin ning Tire inflation pressure specifications apply to approved tire sizes should be disregarded At page 214 under the heading Mount ing the paragraph beginning Have mounting and balancing should be dis regarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof BMW recommends that you have mounting and balancing per formed by your service center or a tire mounting specialist ta 16 17 18 19 At page 215 und
85. to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed especially if your vehicle is equipped with low profile tires Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de fects gt Unusual vibrations while driving gt Unusual handling such as a strong ten dency to pull to the left or right Damage can e g be caused by driving over curbs road damage or similar things In case of tire damage If there are indications of tire damage re duce your speed immediately and have the rims and tires checked right away otherwise there is the increased risk of an accident Drive carefully to the nearest service center If necessary have the vehicle towed or trans ported there Otherwise tire damage can be come life threatening for vehicle occupants and also other traffic lt Repair of tire damage For safety reasons the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you do not have damaged tires repaired they should be re placed Otherwise damage can occur as a re sult lt Changing wheels and tires Mounting Information on mounting tires Have mounting and balancing performed only by a service center If work is not carried out properly there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards lt Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Wheels and tires Mobility Wheel and tire combination You can ask the service center about the right wheel tire combination and wheel rim versions fo
86. vehicle classified as road safe and approved Information about the approved snow chains are available from the service center Use Use only in pairs on the rear wheels equipped with the tires of the following size gt 245 50R 18 gt 245 45 R 19 Follow the snow chain manufacturer s instruc tions Make sure that the snow chains are always sufficiently tight Retighten as needed accord ing to the chain manufacturer s instructions Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after mounting snow chains as doing so may result in incorrect readings Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after mounting snow chains as doing so may result in incorrect readings When driving with snow chains briefly activate Dynamic Traction Control if needed Maximum speed with snow chains Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph 50 km h when using snow chains Snow chain detection The concept When using snow chains settings should be made via the iDrive for the snow chains being applied The snow chain detection system supports you by automatically showing the detected state on the Control Display 219 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Mobility Wheels and tires When snow chains are in use the rear axle steering of the Integral Active Steering is deac tivated automatically At speeds above the maximum permitted speed with snow chains of 30 mph 50 km h the rear axle steering is activated again aut
87. with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems General information Your vehicle contains advanced technology for the reduction of fuel consumption and emis sions Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif ferent factors Carrying out certain measures such as a mod erate driving style and regular maintenance can influence fuel consumption and the envi ronmental impact Remove unnecessary cargo Additional weight increases fuel consumption Remove attached parts following use Remove auxiliary mirrors roof or rear luggage racks which are no longer required following use Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero dynamics and increase the fuel consumption 192 Close the windows and glass sunroof Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open results in increased air resistance and thereby reduces the range Tires General information Tires can affect fuel consumption in various ways e g tire size may influence fuel con sumption Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Check and if needed correct the tire inflation pressure at least twice a month and before starting on a long trip Low tire inflation pressure inc
88. 1 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Displays Lane departure warning System is switched on and under cer lt f f i N tain circumstances warns if a detected lane is left without flashing beforehand For additional information refer to Lane depar ture warning refer to page 130 Green lights Turn signal Turn signal on Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed For additional information refer to Turn signal refer to page 79 Parking lights headlight control Parking lights or headlights are acti vated For additional information refer to Parking lights low beams headlight control re fer to page 104 Front fog lights Front fog lights are activated 40 For additional information refer to Front fog lights refer to page 107 High beam Assistant A High beam Assistant is switched on High beams are activated and off auto matically as a function of the traffic sit uation For additional information refer to High beam Assistant refer to page 106 92 Cruise control p The system is switched on It maintains A the speed that was set using the con trol elements on the steering wheel Automatic Hold The vehicle is automatically held in AUTOH place when it is stationary On inclines the system prevents the vehicle from rolling backward when driving off For more information see Automatic Hold re fer to page 76
89. 1 40 2 954 177 II 15 Opening and closing Controls Retrieving the seat mirror and steering wheel settings The driver s seat exterior mirror and steering wheel position adjusted last will be stored for the active profile When the vehicle is unlocked these positions are automatically retrieved if this function was activated Pinch hazard when moving back the seat If this function is used first make sure that the footwell behind the driver s seat is empty Otherwise people might get injured or objects damaged when the seat is moved back lt The adjustment procedure is interrupted gt When a seat position reel is pressed gt When a button of the seat mirror and steering wheel memory is pressed briefly Activating the setting 1 Settings 2 Doors key 3 Last seat position autom Alarm system The concept When the vehicle is locked the vehicle alarm system responds to gt Opening a door the hood or the trunk lid gt Movements in the interior gt Changes in the vehicle tilt e g during at tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing the car gt Disconnected battery voltage The alarm system briefly signals tampering gt By sounding an acoustic alarm gt By switching on the hazard warning sys tem gt By flashing the daytime running lights Arming and disarming the alarm system When you unlock or lock the vehicle either with the remote control Comfort Access or at
90. 2 10 m or a snowboard of up to 5 ft 1 60 m Preparing and loading the ski bag 1 Fold open the center arm rest and the lid on the inside 2 Open the inside cover and cargo area by pressing the button Securing the ski bag 3 Lay out the ski bag Secure the ski bag by tightening the re 4 Load the ski bag If necessary wrap the taining strap otherwise the contents could sharp edges of the skis present a source of danger to the passengers for example during braking or evasive maneu vers Removing the ski bag The ski bag can be removed entirely e g to dry quickly or to use other inserts 1 Pull the handle forward and lift the ski bag out 2 Close the cover in the cargo area 178 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Interior equipment Controls More information on the various inserts availa ble can be obtained from your service center 179 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Storage compartments Storage compartments Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems
91. 214 Chassis number see vehicle identification number 9 Check Control 89 Checking the engine oil level electronically 223 Checking the oil level elec tronically 223 Children seating position 68 Children transporting safely 68 Child restraint fixing sys tem 68 Child restraint fixing system LATCH 70 Child restraint fixing systems mounting 68 Child safety locks 71 Child seat mounting 68 Child seats 68 Chrome parts care 244 Cigarette lighter 174 Cleaning displays 245 Climate control 165 Climate control laminated tinted safety glass 187 Climate control on roof liner 171 Climate control wind shield 187 Clock 94 Closing opening via door lock 39 Closing opening with remote control 37 Closing the trunk lid with no touch activation 45 Clothes hooks 182 Coasting 196 Coasting with engine decou pled coasting 196 Coasting with idling en gine 196 253 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Reference Everything from A to Z Cold starting refer to Starting the engine 73 Combination reel refer to Turn signals 79 Combination switch refer to Wiper system 80 COMFORT program Driving Dynamics Control 143 Comfort Access 43 COMFORT program Driving Dynamics Control 143 Compressor 216 Computer refer to On board computer 98 Condensation on win dows 166 Condensation under the vehi cle 188 Condition Based Service CBS 228 Configure driving mode 143 Confirmation signal 46 ConnectedDri
92. 4 First aid kit 238 Fitting for towing see Tow fit ting 240 Flat tire changing wheels 234 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 112 Flat tire Tire Pressure Moni tor TPM 114 Flat tire warning lamp 113 115 Flooding 187 Floor carpet care 245 Floor mats care 245 Fold out position wiper 82 Foot brake 188 Front airbags 109 Front end collision warning with braking function 121 Front end collision warning with City Braking func tion 119 Front fog lights 107 Front fog lights bulb replace ment 233 Front passenger seat adjust Ing 55 front seat passenger airbags automatic deactivation 111 Front seat passenger airbags indicator lamp 111 Front seats 53 Front turn signals refer to Light emitting diodes LEDs 232 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 112 Fuel 202 Fuel consumption refer to Average fuel consump tion 99 Fuel filler flap 200 Fuel gauge 93 Fuel lid 200 Fuel quality 202 Fuel recommendation 202 Fuel tank capacity 250 Fuse 236 255 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Reference Everything from A to Z G Garage door opener refer to Universal Integrated Remote Control 172 Gasoline 202 Gear change Steptronic transmission 83 Gear shift indicator 96 General driving notes 186 Gentleman function 55 Glare shield 174 Glass sunroof powered 50 Glove compartment 180 Gross vehicle weight ap proved 249 H Handbrake refer to Parking brake 75 Hand held transmitter al
93. 5 R 20 102 Y XL RSC Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 11 15 2 4135 2 6 38 2 6 38 2 81 41 2 2132 2 3133 2 5 30 2 6138 211 Mobility Wheels and tires Tire size Front 245 35 R 21 96 Y XL RSC Rear 275 30 R 21 98 Y XL RSC Emergency wheel T 135 80 R 18 104 M Pressure specifications in bar PSI 2 8141 3 0 44 Speed up to a max of 50 mph 80 km h 4 2 60 With high speed tuning feature Tire size Specifications in bar PSI with cold tires 245 50 R 18 100 V M S A S RSC 245 50 R 18 100 H M S RSC 245 45 R 19 102 V M S XL A S RSC 245 45 R 19 102 V M S XL RSC Front 245 45 R 19 98 Y RSC Rear 275 40 R 19 101 Y RSC Front 245 40 R 20 99 Y XL RSC Rear 275 35 R 20 102 Y XL RSC 212 Pressure specifications in bar PSI RERA O 2 6 38 2 81 41 3 2 46 2 4135 2 5 36 2 7139 2 139 Tire size Pressure specifications in bar PSI Front 245 35 R21 3 0 44 96 Y XL RSC 32146 Rear 275 30 R 21 98 Y XL RSC Emergency wheel Speed up to a max of T 135 80 R 18104 50 mph 80 km h M 4 21 60 Tire identification marks Tire size 245 45 R 18 96 Y 245 nominal width in mm 45 aspect ratio in R radial tire code 18 rim diameter in inches 96 load rating not for ZR tires Y speed rating before the R on ZR tires Speed letter Q up to 100 mph 160 km h R up to 106 mph 170 km h S up to 112 mph 180 km h T up
94. Battery replace ment section the text should be disre garded and in lieu thereof the following text should be read Use of recommended vehicle batteries The manufacturer of your vehicle recom mends that you use vehicle batteries that it has tested and recommends for use in your vehicle otherwise the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully available After a battery replacement the manufac turer of your vehicle recommends that you have the battery registered on your vehicle by a service center to ensure that all com fort functions are fully available and that any check control messages of these comfort functions are no longer displayed Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Contents The fastest way to find information on a partic ular topic or item is by using the index refer to page 252 6 Notes Ata glance 14 Cockpit 18 iDrive 26 Voice activation system 29 Integrated Owner s Manual in the vehicle Controls 34 Opening and closing 53 Adjusting 68 Transporting children safely 72 Driving 86 Displays 104 Lights 109 Safety 136 Driving stability control systems 144 Driving comfort 165 Climate control 172 Interior equipment 180 Storage compartments Driving tips 186 Things to remember when driving 189 Loading 192 Saving fuel Mobility 200 Refueling 202 Fuel 207 Wheels and tires 221 Engine compartment 223 Engine oil 226 Coolant 228 M
95. Deleting personal in the vehicle The concept Depending on the usage the vehicle saves personal data such as stored radio stations These personal data can be permanently de leted through iDrive General information Depending on the equipment package the fol lowing data can be deleted gt Personal Profile settings Stored radio stations Stored Favorites buttons Travel and computer information Music collection Navigation e g stored destinations Phone book Online data e g Favorites cookies Voice notes Login accounts VV Vv VV VV VY VV RemoteApp smartphone tethering Altogether the deletion of the data can take up to 30 minutes Functional requirement Data can only be deleted while stationary Deleting data Heed and follow the instructions on the Con trol Display Switch on the ignition Settings Open Options Delete personal data Continue OK a SS Ye 24 Entering letters and numbers General information On the Control Display 1 Turn the controller select letters or num bers 2 Select additional letters or numbers if needed 3 OK confirm the entry Symbol Function lt Press the controller delete the let ter or number l lt Press the controller for an extended period delete all letters or numbers Switching between cases letters and numbers Depending on the menu you can reel between entering upper and lower case letters and
96. Front 245 45 R 19 98 Y RSC Rear 275 40 R 19 101 Y RSC Front 245 40 R 20 99 Y XLRSC Rear 275 35 R 20 102 Y XL RSC Front 245 35 R 21 96 Y XL RSC Rear 275 30 R 21 98 Y XL RSC Emergency wheel T 135 80 R 18 104 M Pressure specifications in bar PSI 2 2132 2 3133 2 4135 2 6 38 2 6 38 3 0 44 Speed up to a max of 50 mph 80 km h 4 2 60 With high speed tuning feature Tire size Specifications in bar PSI with cold tires 245 50 R 18 100 H M S RSC 245 45 R 19 102 V M S XL RSC Front 245 45 R 1998 Y RSC Rear 275 40 R 19 101 Y RSC 210 Pressure specifications in bar PSI RERFR O 2 5136 2 81 41 2 7 139 3 2146 2 51 36 2 6 38 Tire size Front 245 40 R20 99 Y XL RSC Rear 275 35 R 20 102 Y XL RSC Front 245 35 R 21 96 Y XL RSC Rear 275 30 R 21 98 Y XL RSC Emergency wheel T 135 80 R 18 104M 760Li Pressure specifications in bar PSI 2 1139 2 9 142 2 9 142 3 41 49 Speed up to a max of 50 mph 80 km h 4 2 60 Without high speed tuning feature Tire size Specifications in bar PSI with cold tires 245 50 Pressure specifica tions in bar PSI RRR C hi 2 6 38 2 8 41 R 18 100 V M S A S RSC 245 50 R 18 100 H M S RSC 245 45 R 19 102 V M S XL A S RSC 245 45 R 19 102 V M S XL RSC Front 245 45 R 19 98 Y RSC Rear 275 40 R 19 101 Y RSC 2 8 41 3 1 45 2 59 36 2 5 36 Online Editi
97. Function refer to page 47 is activated for this purpose 53 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Adjusting Adjustments in detail 1 Forward back 2 Height 54 5 Thigh support Thigh support Multifunctional seat Adjust the position using the lever Sport seat Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust the thigh support Lumbar support The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re gion of the spine The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Adjusting Controls gt Press the front rear section of the switch The curvature is increased decreased gt Press the upper lower sec tion of the switch The curvature is shifted up down Backrest width iF Press button The LED lights up Change the width of the back 2 Adjust the front passenger seat on your rest using the side wings to ad own seal just the lateral support 3 If needed store the memory position refer to page 63 for the front passenger seat 4 Press button to deactivate the function To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle The LED goes out the backrest width temporarily opens fully The function deactivates itself automatically after some time Shoulder support Active seat Active adjustment of the seat cushion s
98. LRSC These pressure values can also be found on a 3 0 44 the tire inflation pressure label on the driver s Rear 275 30 R 21 door pillar 98 Y XL RSC Emergency wheel Speed up to a max of T 135 80 R 18104 20 mph 80 km h M 4 2160 Maximum permissible speed Do not exceed 100 mph 160 km h other wise tire damage and accidents may result Tire inflation pressure values up to 760Li 100 mph 160 km h Specifications in bar PSI with cold RERF R C tires N S R Specifications i parbsiwithood REREAD 245 50 R 18 100V 2 2 32 2 4135 a 0 M S A S RSC 245 50 R 18100 H 245 50R18100V 2 2 32 2 4135 WSO S o M S A S RSC 245 45 R 19102 V 2 4135 26 38 245 50 R 18 100 H M S XL A S RSC MaRSG O R 245 45R19 102V 2 4135 2 6138 M S XL RSC M S XL A S RSC Front 245 45R19 2 3 33 245 45 R 19 102 V 98 Y RSC i 23133 M tSXLRSC gt gt Reat 275 40R19 Front 245 45R19 2 2 32 101 Y RSC 98 Y RSC 2 3133 Front 245 40R20 2 5 36 Rear 275 40 R 19 99 Y XL RSC 25136 101 Y RSC Rear 275 35 R 20 102 Y XL RSC 208 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Wheels and tires Mobility Tire size Front 245 35 R 21 96 Y XL RSC Rear 275 30 R 21 98 Y XL RSC Emergency wheel T 135 80 R 18 104 M Pressure specifications in bar PSI 2 81 41 2 9 142 Speed up to a max of 50 mph 80 km h 4 2160 740Ld xDrive 740Li xDrive 750i xDrive 750Li xDrive Tire size Specificat
99. Only transport children younger than 13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft 150 cm in the rear in child restraint systems provided in accordance with the age weight and size of the child otherwise there is an increased risk of injury in an accident Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a Suitable child restraint system can no longer be used due to their age weight and size Children on the front passenger seat Should it ever be necessary to use a child re straint system in the front passenger seat make sure that the front knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated Automatic deactivation of front seat passen ger airbags refer to page 111 68 the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Note Deactivating the front seat passenger airbags If a child restraint system is used in the front passenger seat deactivate the front seat pas senger airbags otherwise there is an in creased risk of injury to the child when the air bags are activated even with a child restraint system lt Installing child restraint systems Hints Manufacturer s information for child re straint systems To select mount and use child restraint sys tems observe the information provided by the system manufacturer ot
100. Open the coolant reservoir lid 4 Thecoolant level is correct if it lies be tween the minimum and maximum marks in the filler neck Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Coolant Adding 1 Let the engine cool 2 Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pressure to dissipate then open it 3 Ifthe coolant is low slowly add coolant up to the specified level do not overfill 4 Turn the lid until there is an audible click The arrows on the coolant reservoir and the lid must point towards one another 5 Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi nated as soon as possible Disposal Comply with the relevant environmen tal protection regulations when dispos ing of coolant and coolant additives 227 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Mobility Maintenance Maintenance Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems BMW maintenance system The maintenance system indicates required maintenance measures and thereby provides support in maintainin
101. PDC has failed Have the system checked To ensure full functionality gt Keep the sensors clean and free of ice gt dimmedDo not put any stickers on sen sors gt When using high pressure washers do not spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in 30 cm Surround View The concept Surround View comprises various camera as sistance systems that help the driver when parking maneuvering and at complex exits and intersections gt Rearview camera refer to page 155 gt Side View refer to page 158 gt Top View refer to page 159 Rearview camera The concept The rearview camera provides assistance in parking and maneuvering backwards The area behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display Hints Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve hicle with your own eyes Otherwise an acci dent could result from road users or objects that are not lidtured by the camera Ata glance Button in the vehicle Rearview camera 155 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 11 15 Controls Driving comfort Camera Display on the Control Display Functional requirement gt The rearview camera is switched on gt The trunk lid is fully closed Activating assistance functions More than one assistance function can be ac tive at the same time gt Parking aid lines 7 Parking aid lines The camera lens is located
102. Starting the engine with emergency detection of the remote control p 1 Remove integrated key from remote con trol 2 Push in the catch with the key arrow 1 3 Remove the cover of the battery compart ment arrow 2 4 Insert a battery of the same type with the positive side facing up 7 f 5 Press the cover closed If a respective Check Control message ap pears hold the remote control with its back against the marked area on the steering col umn The BMW logo on the remote control should be at the same height as the marked Cy Take the used battery to a recycling center or to your service center New remote controls area Press the Start Stop button within New remote controls are available from the 10 seconds while pressing the brake pedal service center If the remote control is not recognized slightly change the height position of the remote con Loss of the remote controls trol and repeat the procedure Lost remote controls can be disabled by your service center Personal Profile Emergency detection of remote control It is possible to switch on the ignition or start the engine in situations such as the following The concept Personal Profile provides three profiles using which personal vehicle settings can be stored gt Interference of radio transmission to re Every remote control has one of these profiles mote control by external sources e g by assigned ragio Masts If the vehicle
103. TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica tor lamp go out Indicator warning lights If TRACTION is activated TRACTION is dis played in the instrument cluster amp The indicator lamp lights up TRAC oe TION is activated SPORT Sporty driving with optimized suspension and adapted engine control with limited driving sta bilization Dynamic Traction Control is switched on 142 The driver handles several of the stabilization tasks Activating SPORT a Press button repeatedly until SPORT appears in the instrument cluster and the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up Automatic program change When switching on the adjustable speed limit or activating cruise control the program auto matically switches to SPORT mode Indicator warning lights SPORT is displayed in the instrument cluster amp The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up oe Dynamic Traction Control is activated SPORT Consistently sporty tuning of the suspension and engine control for greater driving agility with maximum driving stabilization The program can be configured to individual specifications The configuration is stored for the profile cur rently in use Activating SPORT i Press button repeatedly until SPORT is displayed in the instrument cluster Configuring SPORT When the display is activated on the Control Display refer to page 143 the SPORT driving mode can be set After the SPORT driving mode is activated se le
104. UTO H button refer to Au tomatic Hold 76 AUTO intensity 166 Automatic car wash 242 Automatic climate con trol 165 Automatic Cruise Control with Stop amp Go 144 Automatic Curb Monitor 65 Automatic deactivation front seat passenger airbags 111 Automatic headlight con trol 105 Automatic Hold 76 Automatic locking 46 Automatic recirculated air control 167 Automatic Soft Closing doors 40 Automatic Soft Closing trunk lid 41 Automatic transmission see Steptronic transmission 83 Automatic trunk lid 41 AUTO program automatic cli mate control 166 AUTO program intensity 166 Auto Start Stop function 74 Average fuel consumption 99 Average speed 99 Axle loads weights 249 Backrest curvature refer to Lumbar support 54 Backrest seats 53 Backrest width 55 Band aids refer to First aid kit 238 Bar for tow starting towing 240 Basic position rear seats 58 Battery replacement vehicle battery 235 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Everything from A to Z Reference Battery replacement vehicle remote control 35 Battery vehicle 235 Belts safety belts 59 Beverage holder cu pholder 182 Blinds sun protection 50 BMW Advanced Diesel 203 BMW Assist see user s manual for Navigation En tertainment and Communi cation BMW Driver s Guide App 6 BMW Homepage 6 BMW Internet page 6 BMW maintenance sys tem 228 Bonus range ECO PRO 194 Bottle holder refer to Cu pholder 182 B
105. acement 233 LED headlights bulb replace ment 233 LED light 233 LEDs light emitting di odes 231 Length vehicle 248 Letters and numbers enter ing 24 License plate lamp bulb re placement 233 Light alloy wheels care 244 Light bulb replacement see Lamp and bulb replace ment 230 Light control 105 Light emitting diodes LEDs 231 Lighter rear 175 Lighting 104 Lighting speaker 108 Lights 104 Lights and bulbs see Lamp and bulb replacement 230 Light switch 104 Load 190 Loading 189 Lock door 39 Locking unlocking via door lock 39 Locking unlocking with re mote control 37 Locking automatic 46 Locking settings 46 Locking via trunk lid 41 Lock power window 49 Locks doors and win dows 71 Low beams 104 Low beams automatic refer to High beam Assistant 106 Lower back support 54 Low Sulfur Diesel 203 Lug bolt lock 234 Luggage rack see Roof mounted luggage rack 190 Lumbar support 54 M Maintenance 228 Maintenance require ments 228 Maintenance service require ments 95 Maintenance system BMW 228 Make up mirror 174 Malfunction displays see Check Control 89 Malfunction self leveling sus pension 141 Manual air distribution 166 Manual air flow 166 Manual brake refer to Parking brake 75 Manual mode Steptronic transmission 84 Manual operation door lock 39 Manual operation exterior mirrors 65 Manual operation fuel filler flap 200 Manual operation
106. additional safety margin by driving in a risky manner lt Do not deactivate DSC when driving with roof load Do not deactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC when driving with roof load e g roof mounted luggage rack Otherwise driving safety is not given in driv ing critical situation due to the elevated center of gravity lt Overview Button in the vehicle wel DSC OFF button Indicator warning lights The indicator lamp flashes DSC con 2e trols the drive and braking forces The indicator lamp lights up DSC has failed Deactivating DSC DSC OFF When DSC is deactivated driving stability is reduced during acceleration and when driving in curves Stabilizing interventions by the Integral Active Steering system are only performed by the rear axle steering To increase vehicle stability activate DSC again as soon as possible Deactivating DSC E an Press and hold this button but not lon ce ger than approx 10 seconds until the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in strument cluster and displays DSC OFF The DSC system is switched off The steering and depending on the equip ment suspension are tuned for sporty driving Activating DSC Se ae Press button a DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator lamp go out Indicator warning lights When DSC is deactivated DSC OFF is dis played in the instrument cluster amp The indicator lamp lights up DSC is deactivated
107. ain stops the mo tion The closing operation is interrupted gt When starting the engine gt The vehicle starts off with jerks Keep the closing path clear Make sure that the closing path of the trunk lid is clear otherwise injuries may re sult Do not place the remote control in the cargo area Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area otherwise the re mote control is locked inside the vehicle when the trunk lid is closed lt Manual operation In the event of an electrical fault manually op erate the unlocked trunk lid slowly and smoothly Keep the closing path clear Make sure that the closing path is clear otherwise injuries may result lt Locking separately The trunk lid can be locked separately using the switch in the center armrest If the center arm rest is locked the trunk lid cannot be opened gt Trunk lid secured arrow 1 gt Trunk lid not secured ar row 2 JEJE tf Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position This secures the trunk lid and disconnects it from the central locking system This is beneficial when the vehicle is parked using valet service The infrared remote con trol can be handed out without the key Emergency unlocking Pull the handle inside the cargo area The trunk lid unlocks Comfort Access The concept The vehicle can be accessed without activat ing the remote control All you need to do is to h
108. aintenance 230 Replacing components 237 Breakdown assistance 242 Care Reference 248 Technical data 252 Everything from AtoZ Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 _ Notes Notes Using this Owner s Manual Orientation The fastest way to find information on a partic ular topic is by using the index An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in the first chapter Updates made after the editorial deadline Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the Owner s Manuals are found in the ap pendix of the printed Quick Reference for the vehicle User s manual for Navigation Entertainment Communication The topics of Navigation Entertainment Com munication and the short commands of the voice activation system are described in a sep arate user s manual which is also included with the onboard literature Additional sources of information The service center will be happy to answer any other questions you may have Information on BMW e g on technology is available on the Internet www bmwusa com BMW Driver s Guide App The Owner s Manual is available in many coun tries as an app Additional information on the Internet www bmw com bmw_drivers_guide Symbols FN Indicates precautions that must be followed precisely in order to avoid the possibility of personal injury and serious damage to the vehicle Marks the end of a specific item of information amp Refer
109. all traffic situations Monitor your driving be on the alert observe the vehicle surroundings and other traffic and react when needed e g through braking steering or make evasive maneuvers risk of accident Unfavorable weather conditions In the event of unfavorable weather and light conditions e g if there is rain snowfall slush fog or glare this may result in poorer recognition of vehicles as well as short term interruptions for vehicles that are already de tected Drive attentively and react to the cur rent traffic situation Intervene actively when necessary e g by braking steering or making an evasive maneuver otherwise there is the risk of an accident lt Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Driving comfort Controls Before leaving the vehicle secure it against moving on its own Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run ning set the parking brake and ensure that the Steptronic transmission is in position P Other wise the vehicle may begin to move lt At a glance Buttons on the steering wheel Press but Function on r Cruise control on off interrupt ing refer to page 145 a Store maintain speed refer to page 146 ee oon Resume speed refer to RES page 147 TAK Reduce distance refer to page 147 mm Increase distance refer to ae rocker switch Maintain store change speed refer to page 146 Buttons are arranged a
110. ally Auto matic Hold is deactivated automatically Driving Automatic Hold is activated the vehicle is au tomatically secured against rolling after brak ing to a standstill park The indicator lamp lights up green Step on the accelerator pedal to drive off The brake is released automatically The indicator lamp goes out Before driving into a car wash Before driving into the car wash deacti vate Automatic Hold otherwise the parking brake will be set when the vehicle is stationary and the vehicle will no longer be able to roll lt Parking The parking brake is automatically set if the engine is switched off while the vehicle is be ing held by Automatic Hold park The indicator lamp changes from green to red The parking brake is not set if the en gine is switched off while the vehicle is coast ing to a halt Automatic Hold is deactivated if Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Driving Automatic Hold remains activated during the 1 Remove the screwdriver from the onboard engine stop brought about by the Auto Start vehicle tool kit Stop function Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children e g can not release the parking brake lt Malfunction In the event of a failure or malfunction of the parking brake secure the vehicle against roll ing using a wheel chock e g when leaving it 2 Fol
111. amera immedi ately after vehicle shipment gt If there is constant blinding effects be cause of oncoming light e g from the sun low in the sky Warning sensitivity The more sensitive the warning settings are e g the warning time the more warnings are displayed However there may also be an ex cess of false warnings Front end collision warning with braking function The concept The ystem can help prevent accidents If an accident cannot be prevented the system will help reduce the collision speed The system sounds a warning before an immi nent collision and actuates brakes independ ently if needed The automatic braking intervention may be executed with maximum braking force and for a brief period only as necessary If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise Control with Stop amp Go the front end collision warning Is controlled via the cruise control ra dar sensor in conjunction with a camera The front end collision warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated 121 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 11 15 Controls Safety With the vehicle approaching another vehicle ready to intervene otherwise there is the risk intentionally the collision warning is delayed of an accident lt avoiding false alarm Tow starting and towing General information For tow starting or towing switch off the The system issues a two phase warning of a Intelligent Safety s
112. anging 214 Wheels everything on wheels and tires 207 Wheels Flat Tire Monitor FTM 112 Wheels Tire Pressure Moni tor TPM 114 Width vehicle 248 Window defroster rear 167 Windows powered 48 Windshield climate con trol 187 Windshield washer fluid 82 Windshield washer noz zles 81 Windshield washer sys tem 80 Windshield wiper 80 Winter diesel 203 Winter storage care 245 Winter tires suitable tires 215 Winter tires tread 214 Wiper 80 Wiper blades replacing 230 Wiper fluid 82 Wiper fold out position 82 Wiper system 80 Wood care 244 Word match concept naviga tion 24 Wrench see Onboard vehicle tool kit 230 X xDrive 138 261 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Reference Everything from A to Z Xenon headlights bulb re placement 231 262 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 More about BMW The Ultimate bmwusa com Driving Machine Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 01 40 2954 177 ue
113. ant Coolant Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Hints Danger of burns from hot engine Do not open the cooling system while the engine is hot otherwise esliding coolant may cause burns Suitable additives Only use suitable additives otherwise engine damage may occur The additives are harmful to your health Coolant consists of water and additives Not all commercially available additives are suitable for the vehicle Information about the suitable additives are available from the service center Coolant level General information If there is no Min and Max mark in the filler neck of the coolant reservoir have the coolant level checked if needed by your service center and add coolant as needed Depending on the engine installation the cool ant reservoir is located on the right side or the left side of the engine compartment 226 Checking 1 Let the engine cool 2 Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pressure to dissipate then open it ia 3
114. ard and windshield on the front passenger side must stay clear do not at tach adhesive labels or coverings and do not attach brackets or cables e g for GPS devices or mobile phones gt Make sure that the front passenger is sit ting correctly i e keeps his or her feet and legs in the footwell otherwise leg injuries might occur when front airbag is activated gt Donot place slip covers seat cushions or other objects on the front passenger seat that are not approved specifically for seats with integrated side airbags gt Do not hang pieces of clothing such as jackets over the backrests gt Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag and do not rest against the head airbag otherwise injuries might occur when airbag is activated gt Do not remove the airbag system gt Do not remove the steering wheel 110 gt Do not apply adhesive materials to the air bag cover panels do not cover them or modify them in any way gt Never modify either the individual compo nents or the wiring in the airbag system This also applies to steering wheel covers the dashboard the seats the roof pillars and the sides of the roofliner lt Even when you follow all instructions very closely injury from contact with the airbags cannot be ruled out in certain situations The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short term and in most cases temporary hearing impairment in sensitive indi
115. arning refer to page 124 Hints Personal responsibility The system does not serve as a substi tute for the driver s personal judgment of the traffic situation Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi cle s surroundings at all times otherwise acci dents are still possible despite all warnings lt Adapting your speed and driving style The displays and warnings of the system do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions Be alert Due to system limitations warnings may be not issued at all or may be issued late or improperly Therefore always be alert and ready to intervene otherwise there is the risk of an accident lt Tow starting and towing For tow starting or towing switch off the Intelligent Safety systems otherwise malfunc tions of the individual braking systems might lead to accidents lt 118 Ata glance Button in the vehicle The camera is found near the interior rearview mirror Keep the windshield in the area behind the in terior rearview mirror clean and clear Switching on off The Intelligent Safety systems are automati cally active after every departure Press button the systems are turned off The LED goes out Press button the systems are turned on The LED lights up Settings can be made on the Control Display Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Safety Contro
116. ated to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as gt How various systems in your vehicle were operating gt Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were fastened gt How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal gt How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better under standing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law enforce ment could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely ac quired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehi cle or the EDR is needed In addition to the ve hicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equipment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Vehicle identification number The vehicle identification number can be found in the engine compartment The vehicle identification number can also be found behind the windshield Reporting safety d
117. automatically active after every driving off Switch off ws Press button the system is switched off The LED goes out Re press button the system is switched on The LED lights up Setting the warning time The warning time can be set via iDrive 1 Settings 2 Frontal Coll Warning 3 Activate the desired time on the Control Display The selected time is stored for the profile cur rently in use Warning with braking function Display If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi nent a warning symbol appears in the instru ment cluster and in the Head Up Display Symbol Measure The vehicle lights up red prewarn ing Brake and increase distance The vehicle flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds acute warn ing You are requested to intervene by braking or make an evasive maneu ver BD D Prewarning This warning is issued e g when there is the impending danger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small The driver must intervene actively when there is a prewarning Acute warning with braking function Warning of the imminent danger of a collision when the vehicle approaches another object at a relatively high differential speed The driver must intervene actively when there is an acute warning If necessary the driver is assisted by an automatic braking intervention in a possible risk of collision Acute warnings can also be triggered without pre
118. ave the system checked immediately otherwise serious engine misfiring within a brief pe riod can seriously damage emission con trol components in particular the catalytic converter 229 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Mobility Replacing components Replacing components Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Onboard vehicle tool kit The onboard vehicle tool kit is located in a fold down cover in the trunk lid Unscrew the wing nut to open Wiper blade replacement Hints Do not fold down the wipers without wiper blades Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have not been installed this may damage the windshield 230 Replacing the wiper blades 1 To change the wiper blades fold up refer to page 82 the wiper arms 2 Fold up the wipers 3 Position the wiper blade in a horizontal po sition 4 Remove the wiper blade toward one side 5 Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order of removal until it locks in place 6 Fold down the wipers Lamp an
119. ave the remote con trol with you such as in your pants pocket The vehicle automatically detects the remote control when it is in close proximity or in the car s interior Comfort Access supports the following func tions gt Unlocking locking of the vehicle gt Convenient closing gt Open the trunk lid individually gt Open trunk lid with no touch activation 43 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Opening and closing gt Open close trunk lid with no touch activa tion gt Start the engine Functional requirements gt There are no external sources of interfer ence nearby gt Tolock the vehicle the remote control must be located outside of the vehicle gt The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx 2 seconds gt The engine can only be started if the re mote control is in the vehicle Unlocking y a Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely arrow This corresponds with pressing the button on the remote control gf Locking a Touch the surface on the handle of a vehicle door arrow with your finger for approx 1 sec ond without grasping the door handle 44 This corresponds with pressing the button on the remote control To save battery power ensure that the ignition and all electronic systems and or power con sumers are turned off before locking the vehi cle Convenient closing Monitor clos
120. aximizes the air supply gt Direct ventilation Thumbwheel arrow 3 in level the air gt Thumbwheel for continuous opening and is bundled and can be directed to a specific closing of the vents arrow 1 point gt Lever for changing the air flow direction justi ilati 2 Adjusting the ventilation arrow gt Ventilation for cooling Direct vent in your direction when vehicle s une Rear automatic climate interior is too hot gt Draft free ventilation control Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you Ata glance Ventilation in rear center i 1 03 4 5 6 01 Temperature AUTO program Vent settings Air flow AUTO intensity Display gt Thumbwheels to vary the temperature ar row 1 Toward blue colder Toward red warmer Maximum cooling Seat heating 58 Active seat ventilation 59 gt Lever for changing the air flow direction arrow 2 CON OO FP WN gt Thumbwheels for continuous opening and closing of the vents arrow 3 Switching the rear automatic climate control on off 1 Settings 169 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Climate control 2 Climate 3 Rear climate The rear automatic climate control is not op erational if the automatic climate control is switched off or if the function for defrosting or defogging the windows is active AUTO program AUTO Press button Air flow air distribution and tempera t
121. ay The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni tor TPM can be displayed on the Control Dis play e g whether or not the TPM is active On the Control Display 1 Vehicle info 2 Vehicle status 3 1 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM The status is displayed Status control display Tire and system status are indicated by the color of the wheels and a text message on the Control Display All wheels green System is active and will issue a warning rela tive to the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Safety Controls One wheel is yellow A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in the indicated tire All wheels are yellow A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in several tires Wheels gray The system cannot detect a flat tire Reasons for this may be gt Thesystem is being reset gt Malfunction Status information The status control display additionally shows the current tire inflation pressures and de pending on the model tire temperatures It shows the actual values read they may vary depending on driving style or weather condi tions Carry out reset Reset the system after each adjustment of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change On the Control Display and on the vehicle Vehicle info Vehicle status 1 Perform reset Start the engine do not drive off
122. below gt No moisture in or on the seat Indicator lamp for the front seat passenger airbags The indicator lamp for the front seat passen ger airbags indicates the operating state of the front seat passenger airbags The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei ther activated or deactivated gt The indicator lamp lights up when a child is properly seated in a child restraint fix ing system or when the seat is empty The airbags on the front passenger side are not activated gt The indicator lamp does not light up when e g a correctly seated person of sufficient size is detected on the seat The airbags on the front passenger side are activated Detected child seats The system generally detects children seated in achild seat particularly in child seats re quired by NHTSA when the vehicle was manu 111 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Safety factured After installing a child seat make sure that the indicator lamp for the front seat passenger airbags lights up This indicates that the child seat has been detected and the front seat passenger airbags are not activated Strength of the driver s and front seat passenger airbag The explosive power that activates driver s front passenger s airbags very much depends on the positions of the driver s front passeng er s seat With a respective message appearing on Con trol Display calibrate the front seats to keep
123. ccording to vehicle s series optional features and country specifica tions Radar sensor A radar sensor is located in the front bumper for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the vehicle A dirty or covered sensor may prevent the de tection of vehicles gt If necessary clean the radar sensor Re move layers of snow and ice carefully gt Do not cover the view field of the radar sensor Camera The camera is found near the interior rearview mirror Keep the windshield in the area behind the in terior rearview mirror clean and clear A dirty or covered area in front of the interior mirror may hinder the detection of vehicles If necessary clean the area in front of the inte rior mirror e g carefully remove salt residue in the winter Switching on off and interrupting cruise control Switching on E Press button on the steering wheel R 145 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Driving comfort The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light up and the mark in the speedometer is set to the current speed Cruise control can be used Switch off Deactivated or interrupted system With deactivated or interrupted system use your brakes steering and moves as usual to avoid the chance of an accident lt To switch off the system while standing step on brake pedal at the same time E Press button on the steering wheel R gt If acti
124. ch as the following and driver intervention may be necessary gt In very unfavorable weather conditions such as fog or heavy precipitation gt When detecting poorly lit road users such as pedestrians cyclists horseback riders and wagons when driving close to train or ship traffic and at animal crossings gt In tight curves on hilltops or in depres sions in cross traffic or half obscured on coming traffic on freeways gt In poorly lit towns and cities and in the presence of highly reflective signs gt At low speeds gt When the windshield behind the interior rearview mirror is fogged over dirty or cov ered with stickers etc Fog lights Front fog lights The parking lights or low beams must be switched on EDI Press button The green indicator lamp lights up If the automatic headlight control refer to page 105 is activated the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the front fog lights When the high beams or headlight flasher are activated the front fog lights are not switched on Instrument lighting Adjusting The parking lights or low beams must be switched on to adjust the brightness Adjust the brightness with the thumbwheel Interior lights General information The interior lights footwell lights access lights and courtesy lights are controlled automati cally Thumb wheel for the instrument lighting con trols brightness of some of these featur
125. cked again as soon as it is pushed closed If the trunk lid is opened via the lock with the alarm system armed the alarm is triggered Therefore unlock the vehicle first If the alarm has been triggered accidentally switch off the alarm refer to page 47 Locking and closing Hints Keep the closing path clear Make sure that the closing path of the trunk lid is clear otherwise injuries may re sult Do not place the remote control in the cargo area Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area otherwise the re mote control is locked inside the vehicle when the trunk lid is closed lt Opening and closing Locking a C Press the button on the inside of the trunk lid to lock the vehicle prior to closing The driver s door must be closed for this pur pose Recessed grips in the interior trim of the trunk lid make it easier to pull down the lid Automatic Soft Closing To close it completely push the trunk lid down lightly It is closed automatically Keep the closing path clear Make sure that the closing path is clear otherwise injuries may result lt Automatic tailgate operation Opening During opening the trunk lid pivots back and up Ensure that adequate clearance is available before opening 41 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Opening and closing gt Press button on the exterior of the trunk lid gt
126. cker switch Decrease distance 144 Increase distance 144 152 146 10 Instrument cluster 86 11 Steering wheel buttons right Entertainment source Volume Voice activation 26 Telephone see user s manual for Navigation Entertainment and Communication Thumbwheel for selection lists 98 12 Steering column stalk right ep a D D Ke Q O 3 3 z r D x D 7 R Turn signal 79 4p Vv High beams head light flasher 79 toll kelka High beam Assistant 106 Ji G ie S ar i STOP Roadside parking lights 105 poise gt BC On board computer 98 vn 14 H 9 Steering wheel buttons left 15 Resume speed 152 147 JJ N E b amp Cruise control on off interrupt 151 145 EJ Fe Wiper 80 Rain sensor 81 Clean the windshields and head lights 80 Start stop the engine and switch the ignition on off 73 Auto Start Stop function 74 orn total area Steering wheel heating 67 Adjust steering wheel 66 15 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Ataglance GEIE Cockpit 17 Open trunk lid 40 18 Unlocking the hood Ca All around the center console 1 Control Display 18 8 Parking brake 75 2 Glove compartment top bottom 180 3 Ventilation 168 Auto Hold 76 4 A Hazard warning system 237 ee 9 P yj PDC Park Distance Control 153 Central locking system 40 A Top View 159 Rearview camera 155 5 Radio CD Multimedia
127. con tours reduces muscular tension and fatigue to help prevent lower back pain Also supports the back in the shoulder area gt Results in a relaxed seating position gt Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles Gentleman function Press button The LED lights up The front passenger seat can be adjusted with the switches of the driver s seat 55 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Adjusting Front seat heating The ventilation cools the seat e g if the vehi cle interior is overheated or for continuous cooling at high temperatures Switching on Pa Press button once for each tempera ture level The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit If the journey is continued within approx 15 minutes the seat heating is activated automat ically with the temperature selected last When ECO PRO refer to page 193 is acti vated the heater output is reduced Switch off Press button longer The LEDs go out Temperature distribution The heating action in the seat cushion and backrest can be distributed in different ways On the Control Display Climate Front seat heating Select the required seat moe YS Turn the controller to set the temperature distribution Active seat ventilation front The seat cushion and backrest surfaces are cooled by means of integrated fans 56 Switching on Press button once for each ventilation level
128. concept Opening the main menu Press button MEN 2 Main menu Multimedia Telephone Navigation Office ConnectedDrive Vehicle info Settings The main menu is displayed All iDrive functions can be called up via the main menu Selecting menu items Highlighted menu items can be selected 1 Turn the controller until the desired menu item is highlighted 2 Main menu Multimedia Buttons on controller Radio Telephone 3 j Office MENU Open the main menu R ERE ER E RADIO Opens the Radio menu j dalis ms ee ee O Settings ME Peete umes nn 2 Press the controller NAV Opens the Navigation menu TEL Opens the phone menu 19 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Ataglance GEIG iDrive Menu items in the Owner s Manual In the Owner s Manual menu items that can be selected are set in quotation marks e g Settings Changing between panels After a menu item is selected e g Radio a new panel is displayed Panels can overlap gt Move the controller to the left Closes current display and shows previous display Reopens previous display by pressing BACK button In this case the current panel is not closed gt Move the controller to the right Opens new display on top of previous screen a Manual CARIVARI ENERGY GONG 96 3 KLASSIK 100 0 MHz 101 3 MHz White arrows pointing to the left or right indi cate that additional panels can be
129. consumption and emissions are reduced Savings can begin within a few sec onds of switching off the engine In addition fuel consumption is also deter mined by other factors such as driving style road conditions maintenance or environmental factors Switch off any functions that are not currently needed Functions such as seat heating and the rear window defroster require a lot of energy and reduce the range especially in city and stop and go traffic Reel off these functions if they are not needed The ECO PRO driving program supports the energy conserving use of comfort features These functions are automatically deactivated partially or completely Have maintenance carried out Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle efficiency and operating life The maintenance should be carried out by your service center Also note the BMW Maintenance System refer to page 228 ECO PRO The concept ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves on fuel consumption For this purpose the en gine control and comfort features e g the cli mate control output are adjusted Under certain conditions the engine is auto matically decoupled from the transmission in the D selector lever position The vehicle con tinues traveling with the engine idling to re duce fuel consumption Selector lever position D remains engaged In addition context sensitive instructions are displayed to assist with an op
130. continuous tone Is sounded With front PDC if objects are located both in front of and behind the vehicle an alternating continuous signal is sounded An interval tone is interrupted with the appro priate equipment after about 3 seconds gt Ifthe vehicle stops in front of an object that is detected by only one of the corner sen sors gt If moving parallel to a wall The signal tone is switched off when selector lever position P is engaged on vehicles with Steptronic transmission Volume The volume of the PDC signal tone can be ad justed similar to the sound and volume set tings of the radio Settings are stored for the profile currently in use 154 Visual warning The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display Objects that are farther away are already displayed on the Control Display before a signal sounds A display appears as soon as Park Distance Control PDC is activated The range of the sensors is represented in the colors green yellow and red When the image of the rearview camera is dis played the reel can be made to PDC cy Rear view camera System limits Limits of ultrasonic measurement Ultrasonic measuring might not function under the following circumstances gt For small children and animals gt For persons with certain clothing e g coats gt With external interference of the ultra sound e g from passing vehicles or loud machin
131. ct Configure SPORT on the displayed panel and configure the program SPORT can also be configured before it is acti vated 1 Settings Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Driving stability control systems Controls 2 SPORT mode or Driving mode 3 Configure driving mode This configuration is retrieved when the SPORT driving mode is activated COMFORT For a balanced tuning with maximum driving stabilization Activating COMFORT i Press button repeatedly until COM FORT is displayed in the instrument cluster In certain situations the system automatically changes to the NORMAL program automatic program change refer to page 141 COMFORT Comfort oriented tuning of the shock absorb ers and adapted engine control for optimal traveling comfort with maximum driving stabili zation COMFORT activation i Press button repeatedly until COM FORT is displayed in the instrument cluster ECO PRO ECO PRO refer to page 193 provides consis tent tuning to minimize fuel consumption for maximum range with maximum driving stabili zation Comfort functions and the engine controller are adjusted The program can be configured to individual specifications Activating ECO PRO i Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO is displayed in the instrument cluster Configuring ECO PRO 1 Activate ECO PRO 2 Configure ECO PRO Make the desired settings Configure driving mode
132. ct the nearest service center if the tire cannot be made drivable gt If possible do not remove foreign bodies that have penetrated the tire gt Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant container and apply it to the steering wheel gt The use of a sealant can damage the TPM wheel electronics In this case have the electronics checked at the next opportu nity and have them replaced if needed Enclosed areas Do not let the engine run in enclosed areas since breathing in exhaust fumes may lead to loss of consciousness and death The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas lt Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Wheels and tires Storage Filling the tire with sealant The Mobility System is located under the 1 Shake the sealing container cargo floor panel Sealing container 2 Pull the connection hose fully out of the compressor housing Do not kink the hose gt Sealing container arrow 1 Pi gt Filling hose arrow 2 j Observe use by date on the sealant container L Ai y Compressor 3 Screw the connection hose onto the con nector of the sealant container Holder for bottle Compressor Connector cable for socket Connection hose On off reel Inflation pressure dial NO oo fh WN Reduce inflation pressure 217 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Mobility Wheels and tires 4 Inser
133. cted dis tance refer to page 148 Increase distance Z Press button repeatedly until the de EAA sired distance is set Instrument cluster will display selected dis tance refer to page 148 Calling up the desired speed and distance While driving Press button with the system RES switched on In the following cases the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again gt When the system is switched off gt When the ignition is switched off While standing The system brought the vehicle to a complete standstill gt Green marking in the speedometer Your vehicle accelerates automatically as soon as the vehicle in the range of the ra dar sensor moves off gt Speedometer markings turn orange no au tomatic driving off To accelerate to the desired speed auto matically press the accelerator or press the RES or SET button Rolling bars in the distance display indicate that the the vehicle detected by the radar sen sor has driven off Your vehicle was brought down to a halt through stepping on the brake pedal and it is standing behind another vehicle 1 RES Press button to call up a stored desired speed 2 Release the brake pedal 3 Step on the accelerator briefly or press the RES rocker switch when the vehicle ahead of you drives away 147 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Driving comfort Displays in the instrument cluster Desired
134. d it there for as long as you want the turn signal Push wiper lever up to flash The lever automatically returns to its initial po sition when released High beams headlight flasher Normal wiper speed push up once The wipers switch to intermittent operation when the vehicle is stationary V Fast wiper speed press up twice or press once beyond the resistance point Wipers change to normal speed when ve hicle comes to standstill Switch off and brief wipe gt High beams arrow 1 gt Headlight flasher arrow 2 Washer wiper system Switching the wipers on off and brief wipe Hints Push wiper lever down The lever automatically returns to its initial po Do not activate wipers if frozen to wind i sition when released shield Do not switch on the wipers if they are frozen AAE press out once to the windshield otherwise the wiper blades gt To switch off normal wipe press down and the wiper motor may be damaged lt once l l l gt To switch off fast wipe press down twice Do not activate wipers on dry windshield Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly 80 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Driving Interval mode or rain sensor Setting the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor The concept The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes dependi
135. d bulb replacement Hints Lights and bulbs Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu tion to vehicle safety The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you entrust corresponding procedures to Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Replacing components Mobility the service center if you are unfamiliar those or if they have not been described here You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs at the service center Danger of burns Only change bulbs when they are cool otherwise there is a danger of getting burned Working on the lighting system When working on the lighting system you should always reel off the lights affected to prevent short circuits To avoid possible injury or equipment damage when replacing bulbs observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer lt Do not perform work bulb replacement on xenon headlights Have any work on the xenon lighting system including bulb replacement performed only by a service center Due to the high voltage present in the system there is a danger of fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly Do not touch the bulbs Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with your bare hands as even minute amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb s surface and reduce its service life Use a clean tissue cloth or something similar or hold the bulb by its base lt Light emitting diodes LEDs Some items of equipme
136. d comupter Average speed Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the engine manually stopped are not included in the calculation of the average speed Resetting average values Press and hold the onboard computer button on the turn signal lever Distance to destination The distance remaining to the destination is displayed if a destination is entered in the navi gation system before the trip is started The distance to the destination is adopted au tomatically Time of arrival The estimated time of arrival is displayed if a destination is en tered in the navigation system before the trip is started The time must be correctly set Speed limit detection Description of the speed limit detection refer to page 96 function Trip computer The vehicle features two types of board com puters gt Onboard info the values can be reset as often as necessary gt Trip computer the values provide an overview of the current trip Resetting the trip computer On the Control Display Vehicle info 2 Trip computer 3 Reset all values are reset Automatically reset all values are reset approx 4 hours after the vehicle came to a standstill 99 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Displays Display on the Control Display Display the computer or trip computer on the Control Display 1 Vehicle info 2 Onboard info or Trip computer Resettin
137. d go traffic The vehicle is automatically held in place when it is stationary On inclines the system prevents the vehicle from rolling backward when driving off Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Driving Controls Overview r weg Automatic Hold Safety information Secure the vehicle against rolling Before leaving the vehicle with the en gine running engage position P of the Step tronic transmission and ensure that the park ing brake is set Otherwise the vehicle may begin to move Under the following conditions Automatic Hold is automatically deactivated and the park ing brake is set gt The engine is switched off gt A door is opened and driver s safety belt is unbuckled while the vehicle is stationary gt The moving vehicle is brought to a stand still using the parking brake park he indicator lamp switches from green to red and the letters AUTO H go out Activating This function can be activated when the driv er s door is closed the safety belt is fastened and the engine Is running Press button The LED and the letters AUTO H light AUTOH up The indicator lamp lights up ick Automatic Hold is activated Deactivating weg Press button again The LED and the letters AUTO H go out Automatic Hold is deactivated If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold press on the brake pedal to deactivate it When the parking brake is set manu
138. d light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on Red lights Safety belt reminder e Flashing or illuminated safety belt on A the driver or passenger side is not buckled The safety belt reminder can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly Airbag system Q Airbag system and belt tensioner are As defective Have the vehicle checked by the serv ice center immediately Parking brake park The parking brake is set For additional information refer to Release parking brake refer to page 76 Brake system Ss Continue to drive moderately nila Have the vehicle checked by the serv ice center immediately Front end collision warning Illuminated advance warning is issued e g when there is the impending dan ger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small Increase distance Flashing acute warning of the imminent dan ger of a collision when the vehicle approaches another vehicle at a relatively high differential speed Intervention by braking or make an evasive ma neuver Pedestrian warning m Symbol in the instrument cluster JW t If a collision with a person detected in this way is imminent the symbol lights up and a signal sounds Symbol in the instrument display Orange lights Active Cruise Control _ The
139. d options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Integrated Owner s Manual in the vehicle The Integrated Owner s Manual can be dis played on the Control Display It specifically describes features and functions found in the vehicle Components of the Integrated Owner s Manual The Integrated Owner s Manual consists of three parts which offer various levels of infor mation or possible access Quick Reference Guide The Quick Reference Guide provides informa tion how to operate the car how to use basic vehicle functions or what to do in case of a breakdown This information can also be dis played while driving Search by images Image search provides information and de scriptions This is helpful when the terminol ogy for a feature is not at hand Owner s Manual Search for information and descriptions by en tering terms selected from the index Select components aini Press button Turn the controller open Vehicle info Press the controller a a E Selecting desired range gt Quick reference gt Search by pictures gt Owner s Manua
140. d up the cargo floor panel r Manual release Before releasing secure the vehicle against rolling Before releasing the parking brake manually and whenever you park the vehicle with the parking brake released ensure that position P of the Steptronic transmission is set Secure the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the inclination of the road e g with a wheel 3 Take out the floor trim in the cargo area chock otherwise there is a danger of an acci removing the screws with the screwdriver dent and injuries if the vehicle rolls uninten arrows tionally lt N The parking brake can be released manually in e the event of a power failure or electrical fault Unlocking Have the malfunction corrected If the parking brake has been released manually in response to a malfunction only technicians can return it to operation Have the malfunction corrected by your serv ice center lt 78 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Driving Controls 4 Insert the screwdriver through the loop ar It may take several seconds for the brake to be row put into operation Any sounds associated with this are normal park The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out as soon as the parking brake Is ready for operation Turn signal high beams headlight flasher 5 Forcefully pull the screwdriver up against Turn signal the resistance until you notice a marked in crease in the res
141. damage might occur lt Diesel engines The filler neck is designed for refueling at die sel fuel pumps Fuel lid Opening 1 Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler flap 200 2 Turn the tank lid counterclockwise 3 Place the tank lid in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap Closing 1 Fit the lid and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click 2 Close the fuel filler flap Do not pinch the retaining strap Do not pinch the retaining strap attached to the lid otherwise the lid cannot be closed properly and fuel vapors can escape Manually unlocking fuel filler flap In the event of an electrical malfunction e g The release is located in the trunk Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Refueling Mobility Pull the green knob with the fuel pump symbol This releases the fuel filler flap Observe the following when refueling The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time Do not overfill the fuel tank Do not overfill the fuel tank otherwise fuel may eslide causing harm to the environ ment and damaging the vehicle lt Handling fuels Observe safety regulations posted at the gas station lt 201 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Mobility Fuel Fuel Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It a
142. danger of getting burned Diesel particulate filter The diesel particulate filter collects soot parti cles and burns them periodically at high tem peratures During several minutes of cleaning the follow Ing May occur gt Temporarily the engine may run less smoothly gt Noises and a slight amount of smoke com ing from the exhaust until shortly after the engine is shut down gt Asomewhat higher engine speed is neces sary to reach usual performance Climate control windshield The marked area is not covered with heat re flective coating Use this area for garage door openers devices for electronic toll collection etc Driving tips Climate control laminated tinted safety glass The vehicle glass provides full protection against the harmful effects of UV radiation on the skin Mobile communication devices in the vehicle Mobile communication devices in the ve hicle It is not recommended to use mobile phones such as mobile phones in the vehicle interior without a direct connection to an external aer ial Otherwise the vehicle s electronics and mobile communication devices can interfere with each other In addition there is no assur ance that the radiation generated during trans mission will be conducted away from the vehi cle interior Hydroplaning Hydroplaning When driving on wet or slushy roads re duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning lt On wet or slushy roads a wedge
143. e the system is available but not activated ey The system is activated System status gt Colored symbols see arrows on the side of the vehicle illustrated Parking assistant is activated and search for parking space active gt Control Display shows suitable parking spaces at the edge of the road next to the vehicle symbol When the parking assistant is active suitable parking spaces are high lighted gt The parking procedure is ac tive Steering control has been taken over by system iS gt Parking space search is always active whenever the vehicle is moving forward slow and straight even if the system is de activated When the system is deactivated the displays on the Control Display are shown in gray Parking using the parking assistant Check the traffic situation as well Louds noises outside and inside the ve hicle can drown out the parking assistant s and PDC s signals Check the traffic situation around the vehicle with your own eyes otherwise there is a dan ger of an accident lt 1 Switch on the parking assistant and acti vate it if needed The status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display 2 Follow the instructions on the Control Dis play The best possible parking position will come after gear change on the stationary vehicle wait for the automatic steering wheel move The end of the parking procedure is indi cated on the Control Display
144. e approached at high speed lt Maintaining storing the speed i 7 J Press button Or Press the rocker switch while the system is in terrupted When the system is switched on the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Driving comfort Controls This is displayed in the speedometer and briefly in the instrument cluster Displays in the instrument cluster refer to page 148 When cruise control is maintained or stored DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be turned on if needed Changing the speed Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set If active the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear gt Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the point of resistance the desired speed increases or decreases by approx 1 mph 1 km h gt Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the point of resistance the desired speed increases or decreases by a maxi mum of 5 mph 10 km h Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the action Distance Select a distance Adjust the distance according to the traf fic and weather conditions otherwise there is the risk of an accident Maintain the prescribed safety distance Reduce distance TA Press button repeatedly until the de EGAS sired distance is set Instrument cluster will display sele
145. e controller to set the temperature distribution Active seat ventilation Switching on pa j Press button once for each ventilation E level The highest level is active when three LEDs are lit If when the seat ventilation is turned on the Maximum Cooling function is activated the seat ventilation automatically switches to the highest level When the Maximum Cooling function is switched off the unit switches to the previously set level Switch off Press button longer The LEDs go out Safety belts Seats with safety belt The vehicle has five seats each of which is equipped with a safety belt General information Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by all occupants before driving off For the occupants safety the belt locking mechanism triggers early Slowly guide the belt out of the holder when applying it Although airbags enhance safety by providing added protection they are not a substitute for safety belts The upper shoulder strap s anchorage point will be correct for adult seat occupants of ev ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted gt The two outer safety belt buckles integrated into the rear seat are for pas sengers sitting on the left and right gt The center rear safety belt buckle is solely intended for the center passenger Hints One person per safety belt Never allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt Never allow infants or small childre
146. e driver s safety belt is buckled or the driver s door is closed The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced when the engine is switched off Displays in the instrument cluster The display indicates that the Auto Start Stop function is ready for an Automatic engine Start The display indicates that the conditions for an automatic en Dae gine stop have not been met 74 Functional limitations The engine is not switched off automatically in the following situations gt External temperature too low gt The external temperature is high and auto matic climate control is running gt The car s interior has not yet been heated or cooled to the required level gt The engine is not yet at operating temper ature gt The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steering wheel is being turned gt After driving in reverse V Fogging of the windows when the auto matic climate control is switched on Vehicle battery is heavily discharged At higher elevations The engine compartment lid is unlocked HDC Hill Descent Control is activated The parking assistant is activated Stop and go traffic YI yy yy y The selector lever is in position N M S or R gt Use of fuel with high ethanol content Starting the engine The engine starts automatically under the fol lowing conditions gt Steptronic transmission By releasing the brake pedal When Automatic Hold is activated press the acce
147. e glove compartment immediately af ter use while driving otherwise injury may oc cur during accidents lt Locking the storage compartment g i Ta 4 l F oan i l Opening E The storage compartment in the armrest can be locked with an integrated key to separately m i nE E secure the trunk lid refer to page 43 e g After the storage compartment is locked the Closing remote control can be handed out without the Fold cover ciosed integrated key refer to page 34 for instance at j a hotel This prevents access to the storage compart Center armrest ment and to the cargo area Front Connection for an external audio device A storage compartment is located in the center armrest between the front seats An external audio device e g an MP3 player can be con nected via the AUX IN port or the USB audio interface in the center armrest 181 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Storage compartments Rear A storage compartment is located in the center armrest between the seats Opening Depending on the equipment in your vehicle the button is in the depression at the front of the center armrest or on top of the center arm rest Cupholders Hints Shatter proof containers and no hot drinks Use light and shatter proof containers and do not transport hot drinks Otherwise there is the increased danger of injury in an accident lt Unsuitable contain
148. e not issued at all or may be issued late or improperly Therefore always be alert and ready to intervene otherwise there is the risk of an accident lt Tow starting and towing For tow starting or towing switch off the Intelligent Safety systems otherwise malfunc tions of the individual braking systems might lead to accidents lt At a glance Button in the vehicle Intelligent Safety button 125 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 11 15 Controls Safety Camera ae The camera is found near the interior rearview mirror Keep the windshield in the area behind the in terior rearview mirror clean and clear Switching on off Switching on automatically The system is automatically active after every driving off Switch off a Press button the systems are turned Mm off The LED goes out Press button the systems are turned on The LED lights up Warning with braking function Display If a collision with a person detected in this way is Imminent a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster and in the Head up Display e The red symbol is displayed and a sig ZMN nal sounds With instrument display The red sym f bol is displayed and a signal sounds Intervene immediately by braking or make an evasive maneuver 126 Braking intervention The warning prompts the driver himself herself to react During a warning the maximum brak ing force is used
149. e system may not be fully functional in the following situations gt In heavy fog rain sprayed water or snow fall In tight curves gt Ifthe driving stability control systems are limited or deactivated e g DSC OFF gt If depending on the vehicle equipment version the field of view of the camera in 124 the mirror or the radar sensor is dirty or ob scured gt Upto 10 seconds after the start of the en gine via the Start Stop knob gt During calibration of the camera immedi ately after vehicle shipment gt If there is constant blinding effects be cause of oncoming light e g from the sun low in the sky Warning sensitivity The more sensitive the warning settings are e g the warning time the more warnings are displayed However there may also be an ex cess of false warnings Pedestrian warning Depending on how the vehicle is equipped the function warns of an imminent collision with pedestrians during daytime or nighttime The function is subdivided into the following systems gt During daytime Pedestrian warning with city braking function refer to page 124 gt At night Night vision refer to page 127 Pedestrian warning with city braking function The concept The ystem can help prevent accidents with pe destrians The system issues a warning in the city driving speed area if there is imminent danger of a col lision with pedestrians and includes a braking function
150. e vehicle responds more sensitively to steering wheel movements in the higher speed range The stability enhancing intervention may be deactivated Proceed cautiously and drive defensively Have the system checked Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Driving stability control systems Controls Self leveling suspension The concept The self leveling suspension keeps the vehicle height and ground clearance constant The height of the vehicle at the rear axle is main tained at a predefined level under all load con ditions The system ensures consistent comfort by keeping spring travel constant in all driving sit uations Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed The system is disrupted Vehicle handling may be altered and driving comfort may be noticeably reduced Visit your nearest service center Driving Dynamics Control The concept The Driving Dynamics Control can be used to adjust the driving dynamics of the vehicle For this purpose various programs are available for selection that are activated via the two buttons of the Driving Dynamics Control and the DSC OFF button Overview Button in the vehicle Operating the programs Press button Program DSC OFF TRACTION SPORT SPORT COMFORT COMFORT ECO PRO Automatic program change The system may automatically switch to COM FORT in the following situations gt Failure of Integral Active Steering gt Failure
151. easant odors or pollu tants in the immediate environment by tempo rarily suspending the supply of outside air The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle S Press button repeatedly to select an operating mode gt LEDs off outside air flows in continuously Left LED on automatic recirculated air control a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and shuts off automatically gt Right LED on recirculated air mode the supply of outside air into the vehicle is per manently blocked If the windows are fogged over switch off the recirculated air mode and press the AUTO button on the driver s side to utilize the con densation sensor Make sure that air can flow to the windshield Sufficient ventilation When remaining in the vehicle for an ex tended period of time ensure sufficient exter nal ventilation Do not continuously use recir culated air mode otherwise the air quality in the interior continuously deteriorates and win dow condensation increases lt Cooling function The car s interior can only be cooled with the engine running AIC Press button The air will be cooled and dehumidi fied and depending on the temperature set ting warmed again Depending on the weather the windshield and side windows may fog up briefly when the en gine is started The cooling function is switched on automati cally with the AUTO program When using the automatic climate contr
152. eating rear 58 Seating position for chil dren 68 Seat mirror and steering wheel memory 63 Seats 53 Seats front 53 Seats rear 56 Seat ventilation front 56 Seat ventilation rear 59 Selection list in instrument cluster 98 Selector lever Steptronic transmission 83 Self leveling suspension air suspension 141 Self leveling suspension malfunction 141 Sensors care 245 Service and warranty 8 Service requirements Condi tion Based Service CBS 228 Service requirements dis play 95 Services ConnectedDrive SET button see Active Cruise Control ACC 144 SET button see Cruise con trol 151 Settings locking unlock ing 46 Settings on Control Dis play 100 Settings storing for seat mir rors steering wheel 63 259 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Reference Everything from A to Z Shift paddles on the steering wheel 85 Shoulder support 55 Side airbags 109 Side View 158 Signaling horn 14 Signals when unlocking 46 Sitting safely 53 Size 248 Ski bag 178 Slide tilt glass roof 50 Smallest turning radius 248 Smoker s package 174 Snow chains 219 Socket 176 Socket OBD Onboard Diag nostics 229 Soot particulate filter 187 SOS button 237 Spare fuse 236 Speaker lighting 108 Specified engine oil types 225 Speed average 99 Speed limit detection on board computer 99 Speed limiter display 96 Speed Limit Information 96 Speed warning 100 Split sc
153. eeds above approx 30 mph 50 km h The system indicates whether there are vehi cles in the blind spot arrow 1 or approaching from behind on the adjacent lane arrow 2 The lamp in the exterior mirror housing is dim med Before you change lanes after setting the turn signal the system issues a warning in the sit uations described above The lamp in the exterior mirror housing flashes and the steering wheel vibrates Hints Personal responsibility The system does not serve as a substi tute for the driver s personal judgment of the traffic situation Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi cle s surroundings at all times otherwise acci dents are still possible despite all warnings lt 132 At a glance Button in the vehicle Active Blind Spot Detection Radar sensors The radar sensors are located under the rear bumper Switching on off A Press button gt On the LED lights up gt Off the LED goes out Settings are stored for the profile currently in use Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Display Lamp in the exterior mirror housing Information stage The dimmed lamp in the exterior mirror hous ing indicates when there are vehicles in the blind spot or approaching from behind Warning If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the critical zone the steering wheel vibrates briefly and the lamp in the exterior mirror housing flashes br
154. efects For US customers The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause in jury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis tration NHTSA in addition to notifying BMW of North America LLC P O Box 1227 West Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 wt Notes wood New Jersey 07675 1227 Telephone 1 800 831 1117 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or BMW of North America LLC To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washing ton DC 20590 You can also obtain other in formation about motor vehicle safety from http Awww safercar gov For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety related defect to Transport Canada De fect Investigations and Recalls may call the toll free hotline 1 800 333 0510 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http Awww tc gc ca roadsafety 10 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II
155. em on off Switch off gt Complete system py Press and hold the left button on the driver s side until the control clicks off gt On the front passenger side apy Press and hold the left button on l the front passenger side 168 Switching on Press any button except gt Rear window defroster Left side of Air volume button Seat heating Seat ventilation VV y y If necessary SYNC program Microfilter activated charcoal filter The microfilter removes dust and pollen from the incoming air The activated charcoal filter removes gaseous pollutants from the outside air that enters the vehicle This combined filter should be replaced during scheduled maintenance refer to page 228 of your vehicle Ventilation Front ventilation gt Thumbwheels to vary the temperature in the upper body region arrow 1 Toward blue colder Toward red warmer The set interior temperature for the driver and passenger are not changed gt Lever for changing the air flow direction arrow 2 gt Thumbwheels for opening and closing the vents continuously arrows 3 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Climate control Controls Ventilation levels Lateral ventilation gt Draft free ventilation Thumbwheel arrow 3 in level the air current is fanned out gt Maximum air flow Thumbwheel arrow 3 in level the air is partially fanned out and partially bundled This m
156. em parts 1 Place in the center behind the vehicle about an arm s length from the vehicle rear 2 Move a foot in the direction of travel as far under the vehicle as possible and immedi ately pull it back With this movement the leg must pass through the ranges of both sensors Opening Perform the foot movement described earlier Before the opening the hazard warning sys tem flashes The trunk lid opens regardless of whether it was previously locked or unlocked During opening the trunk lid pivots back and up Ensure that adequate clearance is available before opening Preventing inadvertent opening In situations where the trunk lid is not to be opened with no touch activation ensure that the remote control is located beyond the range of the sensor at least 5 ft 1 50 m from the rear of the car Otherwise the trunk lid may be opened inad vertently for example by an unintentional or misinterpreted movement of the foot lt Closing Tailgate closing with no touch activation is only possible with automatic tailgate operation Perform the foot movement described earlier The hazard warning system flashes on and an acoustic signal sounds before the trunk lid closes When closing the trunk lid pivots back and down The closing of the trunk lid has no effect on the locking of the vehicle Another foot movement can interrupt the clos Ing Operation Avoiding unintentional closing In situation
157. en driving forward the speed decreases to approx 6 mph 10 km h when reversing the speed decreases to approx 4 mph 6 km h Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Driving stability control systems Controls Activating HDC Mj Press button the LED above the button lights up Deactivating HDC Press button again and the LED goes out HDC is automatically deactivated above approx 37 mph 60 km h Display in the instrument cluster The selected speed is displayed in the soeedometer 10 ge gt Green the system is actively braking the vehicle gt Orange the system is on standby Malfunction A message is displayed in the instrument clus ter HDC is not available e g due to elevated brake temperatures Adaptive Drive The concept Adaptive Drive includes the following systems gt Dynamic Drive refer to page 139 gt Dynamic Damping Control refer to page 139 The system increases driving stability and driv ing comfort Dynamic Drive The concept The system reduces the lateral inclination of the vehicle that occurs during rapid driving in curves or during quick evasive maneuvers Driving stability and driving comfort are in creased under all driving conditions The sys tem utilizes active stabilizer bars on the front and rear axles that react immediately to all driv ing situations Programs The system offers two different programs Select the programs via the
158. ence the system automatically becomes active again Declaration according to NHTSA FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and in flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pres sure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires aS soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pres sure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel ef ficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped wi
159. er Emptying Push in the lighter Take out the insert The lighter can be removed as Lighter soon as it pops back out Oe Danger of burns Only hold the hot lighter by its knob oth erwise there is a danger of getting burned Switch off the ignition and take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children cannot use the lighter and burn themselves lt Push in the lighter Replace the cover after use Danger of burns Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after Only hold the hot lighter by its knob oth use otherwise objects may get into the lighter erwise there is a danger of getting burned socket or fixture and cause a short circuit lt Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children cannot use the lighter and burn themselves lt Replace the cover after use Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after use otherwise objects may get into the lighter socket or fixture and cause a short circuit lt The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out 175 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Interior equipment In the front passenger footwell Connecting electrical devices Hints Do not connect charging devices to the 12 volt socket in the vehicle Do not connect battery chargers to the fac tory installed 12 volt sockets in the vehicle as this may damage the vehicle battery due to an increased power consumption lt
160. er the heading Approved wheels and tires the term Approved should be disregarded and in lieu thereof the term Recommended should be read in its place In addition the text of that sec tion should be disregarded and the follow ing text should be read in lieu thereof The manufacturer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you use wheels and tires that have been recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle type other wise for example despite having the same official size ratings variations can lead to body contact and with it the risk of severe accidents The manufacturer of your vehicle does not evaluate non recommended wheels and tires to determine if they are suitable for use on your vehicle At page 219 under the heading Snow Chains the text should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof Only certain types of fine link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of your vehicle and are determined by the manufacturer of your vehicle to be road safe and are recommended by the manufacturer of your vehicle Information about recommended snow chains is available from a service center At page 221 under the heading Hood the sentence beginning If you are unfamiliar should be disregarded At page 225 under the heading Engine Oil Change the text should be disregarded and in lieu thereof should be read as follows BMW recom
161. eractive map in the navigation system and Internet sites Function Controls Swipe into re spective direc tion Move interactive map or Internet sites Enlarge shrink interactive map or Internet sites Drag in or out on the touchpad with fingers Display the menu or open Tap once a link in the Internet Changing settings You may change control display settings via touchpad Swipe left or right accordingly Example setting the clock Setting the clock On the Control Display 1 iii Press button The main menu is dis played 2 Turn the controller until Settings is high lighted and then press the controller Main menu Multimedia Radio Telephone Navigation Office ConnectedDrive Vehicle info Settings 3 If necessary move the controller to the left to display Time Date 21 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Ataglance GEEWA iDrive 4 Turn the controller until Time Date is Radio symbols highlighted and then press the controller I amp Settings Tna H HD Radio station is being received Language Units 7 1 i dk Satellite radio is switched on Tone Speed Climate Telephone symbols Lighting Doors Key pea aw Incoming or outgoing call 5 Turn the controller until Time is high g 23 lighted and then press the controller N Missed call _ amp Time Date all Wireless network reception Time 09 30 strength
162. ere switched off manually If the button is pressed again within 10 sec onds after vehicle was locked the interior mo tion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the anti theft warning system refer to page 48 are turned off After locking wait 10 seconds be fore pressing the button again Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation d Press button on the remote control for at least 3 seconds To reel off the alarm press any button 38 Opening the trunk lid p Press button on the remote control for approx 1 second The trunk lid opens regardless of whether the vehicle was previously locked or unlocked During opening the trunk lid pivots back and up Ensure that adequate clearance is available before opening Depending on the features and the country version it is also possible to have door un locked Create the settings refer to page 46 If the doors were not unlocked the trunk lid is locked again as soon as it closes Do not place the remote control in the cargo area Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area otherwise the re mote control is locked inside the vehicle when the trunk lid is closed lt Switching on the headlight courtesy delay feature d Briefly press the button on the remote control The duration can be set in the Control Display Malfunction Remote control detection by the vehicle can among o
163. ers Do not forcefully push unsuitable con tainers into the cupholders This may result in damage lt Ay i s N gt bs N 5 QDS rr i a To open press on the cover Rear In the front of the center armrest 182 To open press the button To close slide back Clothes hooks The clothes hooks are located next to the grab handles in the rear and on the door pillar in the rear Do not obstruct view When suspending clothing from the hooks ensure that it will not obstruct the driv er s view lt No heavy objects Do not hang heavy objects from the hooks otherwise they may present a danger to passengers during braking and evasive ma neuvers lt Cargo area Net Smaller objects can be stored in the net on the side of the cargo area To transport larger objects it can be pushed down Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Storage compartments Controls Storage under the cargo floor panel Fold up the cargo floor panel Storage compartment on the side A Under the cover on the side of the cargo area is a storage compartment that can be used to store the printed Owner s Manual e g Remove the cover Lashing eyes To secure the cargo refer to page 190 there are lashing eyes in the cargo area 183 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Driving tips This chapter provides you with information useful in dealing with
164. ersal garage door opener ensure that there are no people animals or objects within the range of movement of the remote controlled system otherwise there is a risk of injury or damage Also follow the safety instructions of the hand held transmitter lt The system such as the garage door can be operated using the button on the interior rear view mirror while the engine is running or when the ignition is started To do this hold down the button within receiving range of the system until the function is activated The interior rear view mirror LED stays lit while the wireless sig nal is being transmitted Deleting stored functions Press and hold the left and right button on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap 174 A ON AN A K J proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly All stored functions are deleted The functions cannot be deleted individually Sun visor Glare shield Fold the sun visor down or up Vanity mirror A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be hind a cover When the cover is opened the mirror lighting switches on Ashtray cigarette lighter Front Opening Press on the cover Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Interior equipment Controls Emptying Rear Opening Place your finger in the depression next to the ashtray arrow and push up at the same time The ashtray can be removed Press on the cover Light
165. ery tire or wheel change Status display The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can be displayed on the Control Display e g whether or not the FTM is active On the Control Display 1 Vehicle info 2 Vehicle status 3 1 Flat Tire Monitor FTM The status is displayed Initialization When initializing the once set inflation tire pressures serve as reference values in order to detect a flat tire Initialization is started by con firming the tire inflation pressures Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains On the Control Display 1 Vehicle info 2 Vehicle status Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 11 15 Safety Controls 1 Perform reset Start the engine do not drive off Start the initialization with Perform reset a gt p Drive away The initialization is completed while driving which can be interrupted at any time The initialization automatically continues when driving resumes Indication of a flat tire The yellow warning lamp lights up A Check Control message is displayed There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure 1 Reduce your speed and stop cautiously Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers 2 Check whether the vehicle is fitted with regular tires or run flat tires Run flat tires refer to page 216 are la beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire
166. es gt When sensors are dirty iced over dam aged or out of position gt Under certain weather conditions such as high relative humidity rain snowfall ex treme heat or strong wind gt With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles With thin or wedge shaped objects gt With moving objects With elevated protruding objects such as ledges or cargo With objects with corners and sharp edges gt With objects with a fine surface structure such as fences gt For objects with porous surfaces Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Driving comfort Controls Low objects already displayed e g curbs can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds False warnings PDC may issue a warning under the following conditions even though there is no obstacle within the detection range gt In heavy rain gt When sensors are very dirty or covered with ice When sensors are covered in snow gt On rough road surfaces On uneven surfaces such as speed bumps gt In large buildings with right angles and smooth walls e g in underground ga rages In automatic car washes gt Through heavy pollution Due to other ultrasound sources e g sweeping machines high pressure steam cleaners or neon lights Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded area on the Control Display
167. es 107 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Lights Overview Ambient light Depending on the equipment the lighting can be individually adjusted in the interior for some lights Selecting color scheme 1 Settings 2 Lighting 3 Ambient 4 Select desired setting 1 Interior lights With a color scheme selected and welcome lights activated they illuminate in the line s color when vehicle is unlocked 2 Reading lamp Switching the interior lights on and off Press button Setting the brightness The brightness of the ambient light can be ad To reel off permanently press the button for justed via the thumbwheel for the instrument approx 3 seconds lighting or on the Control Display Switch back on press button 1 Settings 2 Lighting Reading lights 3 Brightness Press button 4 Adjust the brightness Reading lights are located at the front and rear next to the interior lights Bang amp Olufsen High End Surround Sound System Adjusting speaker lighting Some speakers in the vehicle are illuminated The lighting can be individually set Settings Lighting B amp O Select the desired lighting setting Yh gt Off no lighting gt Reduced the speakers in the field of view are faded while driving gt On the speakers are always illumi nated 108 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Safety Controls Safety
168. es Carefully clean components such as the radia tor grille or door handles with an ample supply of water possibly with shampoo added partic ularly when they have been exposed to road Salt Rubber components Aside from water treat only with rubber cleansers When cleaning rubber seals do not use any silicon containing car care products in order to avoid damage or noises Fine wood parts Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo nents only with a moist rag Then dry with a soft cloth Plastic components These include Imitation leather surfaces Roofliner Lamp lenses Instrument cluster cover Matt black spray coated components Y FF iy Ny y Painted parts in the interior Clean with a microfiber cloth Dampen cloth lightly with water Do not soak the roofliner No cleansers that contain alcohol or sol vents Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents such as lacquer thinners heavy duty grease removers fuel or such this could lead to surface damage lt Safety belts Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Care Mobility Chemical cleaning Keeping out moisture Do not clean chemically this can destroy Keep all fluids and moisture away from the webbing lt the unit otherwise electrical components can bed d lt Use only a mild soapy solution with the safety ee bel
169. es 500 km to achieve optimal per formance between brake discs and brake pads Drive moderately during this break in pe riod Following part replacement The same break in procedures should be ob served if any of the components above men tioned have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle s operating life General driving notes Closing the trunk lid Drive with the trunk lid closed Only drive with the tailgate closed other wise in the event of an accident or braking and evasive maneuvers passengers and other traf fic may be injured and the vehicle may be damaged In addition exhaust fumes may en ter the vehicle interior lt If driving with the tailgate open cannot be avoided gt Close all windows and the glass sunroof gt Greatly increase the air flow from the vents gt Drive moderately Hot exhaust system Hot exhaust system High temperatures are generated in the exhaust system Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Things to remember when driving Do not remove the heat shields installed and never apply undercoating to them Make sure that flammable materials e g hay leaves grass etc do not come in contact with the hot exhaust system while driving while in idle po sition mode or when parked Such contact could lead to a fire resulting in an increased risk of serious personal injury as well as prop erty damage Do not touch hot exhaust pipes otherwise there is a
170. eset was done gt Inflation was not carried out according to specifications gt The tire inflation pressure has fallen below the level of the last confirmation In this case gt Check the tire pressure and correct as needed gt Carry out a reset of the system after a tire change System limits The system does not function properly if a re set has not been carried out e g a flat tire is Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Safety Controls reported though tire inflation pressures are correct The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire s temperature Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the tire s temperature thus increasing the tire inflation pressure The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the tire temperature falls again These circumstances may cause a warning when temperatures fall very sharply Malfunction then lights up continuously A Check Control message is displayed No flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be de tected The yellow warning lamp flashes and Display in the following situations gt A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted have the service center check it if needed gt Malfunction have the system checked by your service center gt TPM was unable to complete the reset Reset the system again gt Interference through systems or devices with the same radio frequency after leav ing the area of the interfer
171. event of an acci dent If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat move the passenger seat carefully forward un til the best possible belt guide position is reached Backrest width Backrest width for the child seat Before installing a child restraint system in the front passenger seat the backrest width must be opened completely Do not change the adjustment after this otherwise the stabil ity of the child seat will be reduced lt Adjustable backrest width before installing a child restraint system in the front passenger seat open the backrest width completely Do not change the backrest width again and do not call up a memory position Child seat security pe F f r l l a ri a a A f 4 a i od F AZ Ai 7 gt The rear safety belts and the front passenger safety belt can be permanently locked to fas ten child restraint systems The front passenger safety belt can be perma nently locked to fasten child restraint systems Locking the safety belt 1 Pull out the strap completely 2 Secure the child restraint system with the belt Allow the strap to be pulled in and pull it tight against the child restraint system The safety belt is locked wo Unlocking the safety belt 1 Unbuckle the belt buckle 2 Remove the child restraint system 3 Allow the strap to be pulled in completely 69 Online Edition for Part no 01
172. features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Overview 1 Rear fog lights 2 Front fog lights 3 Depending on the equipment automatic headlight control Adaptive Light Control High beam Assistant Welcome lights Daytime running lights 4 Lights off daytime running lights 5 Parking lights daytime running lights 6 Depending on the equipment low beams welcome lights High beam Assistant 7 Instrument lighting 104 Parking lights low beams headlight control General information Position of switch 0 D 20 If the driver door is opened with the ignition switched off the exterior lighting is automati cally switched off at these switch settings Parking lights Position of switch D QE the vehicle s lights light up on all sides e g for parking Do not use the parking lights for extended pe riods otherwise they might drain the battery and it would then be impossible to start the en gine When parking it is preferable to switch on the one sided roadside parking lights refer to page 105 Low beams Position of switch ZD with
173. g road safety and the op erational reliability of the vehicle In some cases scopes and intervals may vary according to the country specific version Re placement work spare parts fuels and lubri cants and wear materials are calculated sepa rately Additional information is available from the service center Condition Based Service CBS Sensors and special algorithms take into ac count the driving conditions of your vehicle Based on this Condition Based Service recog nizes the maintenance requirements The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance corresponding to your user profile Detailed information on service requirements refer to page 95 can be displayed on the Con trol Display 228 Service data in the remote control Information on the required maintenance is continuously stored in the remote control Your service center will read out this data and suggest the right array of service procedures for your vehicle Therefore hand your service specialist the re mote control with which the vehicle was driven most recently Storage periods Storage periods during which the vehicle bat tery was disconnected are not taken into ac count If this occurs have a service center update the time dependent maintenance procedures such as checking brake fluid and if needed changing the engine oil and the microfilter activated charcoal filter Service and Warranty Information Booklet for
174. g the fuel consumption or speed On the Control Display 1 Vehicle info 2 Onboard info 3 Consumpt or Speed 4 Yes Sport displays The concept On the Control Display the current values for performance and torque can be displayed if the vehicle is appropriately equipped Displaying sport displays on the Control Display 1 Vehicle info 2 Sport displays Speed warning The concept Displays a speed when reached should cause a warning to be issued The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed drops below the set speed once by at least 3 mph 5 km h 100 Displaying setting or changing the speed warning On the Control Display Settings Speed Warning at Sy eS Turn the controller until the desired speed is displayed 5 Press the controller Speed warning is stored Activating deactivating the speed warning On the Control Display Settings Speed Warning e O a Press the controller Setting your current speed as the speed warning On the Control Display Settings Speed Select current speed w oS Press the controller The current vehicle speed is stored as the speed warning Settings on the Control Display Time Setting the time zone 1 Settings 2 Time Date Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Displays Controls 3 Time zone 4 Select the desired time zone The time zone is stored Setting the ti
175. ght curves Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations gt On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel roads On slippery ground gt On steep uphill or downhill grades With accumulations of leaves snow in the parking space Limits of ultrasonic measurement Ultrasonic measuring might not function under the following circumstances 164 gt For small children and animals gt For persons with certain clothing e g coats gt With external interference of the ultra sound e g from passing vehicles or loud machines gt When sensors are dirty iced over dam aged or out of position gt Under certain weather conditions such as high relative humidity rain snowfall ex treme heat or strong wind gt With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles With thin or wedge shaped objects With moving objects gt With elevated protruding objects such as ledges or cargo gt With objects with corners and sharp edges With objects with a fine surface structure such as fences gt For objects with porous surfaces Low objects already displayed e g curbs can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds The parking assistant may identify parking spaces that are not suitable for parking Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed The parking assistant failed Have the system checked Onli
176. h the vehicle and screw it all the way in gt Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads only gt Use tow fitting located in the front only for positioning the vehicle gt Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting e g do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting Otherwise damage to the tow fitting and the vehicle can occur Screw thread for tow fitting Push out the cover by pressing on the top edge Tow starting Note Do not tow start the vehicle Tow starting the engine is not possible due to the transmission Breakdown assistance Have the cause of the starting problems fixed 241 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Mobility Care Care Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Car washes General information Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves in the area below the windshield when the hood is raised Wash your vehicle frequently particularly in winter Intense soiling and road salt can dam age the vehicle Hints Steam jets or high pressure washers When us
177. h an incorrect fluid A Check Control message is displayed when an incorrect fluid is added After adding the incorrect fluid contact your service center System defect A Check Control message is displayed when there is a system defect Have the diesel exhaust fluid replenished The reducing agent is added by the service center within the context of regular mainte nance It may be necessary to have the fluid replen ished several times under particular circum stances e g if the vehicle is driven in a partic ularly sporty style or if it is driven at high altitudes The reducing agent must be replenished as soon as the reserve display appears in the in strument cluster to avoid not being able to re start the engine 204 Diesel exhaust fluid at low temperatures Due to its physical properties it is possible that the reducing agent may also need to be replenished between regular maintenance ap pointments if it is exposed to temperatures un der 23 F 5 C In this case add reducing agent only immediately before driving off The need to replenish it is indicated by the Re serve display in the instrument cluster At temperatures below 12 F 11 C the fill ing level cannot be measured in some cases After adding reducing agent the Reserve Dis play is displayed only until the fill level can be measured again Replenishing Diesel exhaust fluid yourself in exceptional cases You can replenish
178. h no touch activation 45 Trunk lid via remote con trol 38 Turning circle 248 Turning circle lines rearview camera 157 Turn signals operation 79 Turn signals rear bulb re placement 233 U Unintentional alarm 48 Units of measure 101 Universal remote control 172 Unlock button Steptronic transmission 83 Unlocking locking via door lock 39 Unlocking locking with re mote control 37 Unlocking settings 46 Updates made after the edito rial deadline 7 Upholstery care 244 USB interface 176 V Vanity mirror 174 Variable steering Integral Ac tive Steering 140 Vehicle battery 235 Vehicle battery replac Ing 235 Vehicle break in 186 Vehicle care 243 Vehicle features and op tions 6 Vehicle identification num ber 9 Vehicle jack 234 Vehicle paint 243 Vehicle storage 245 Vehicle wash 242 Ventilation 168 Ventilation refer to Parked car ventilation 171 Venting see ventilation 168 Vent see ventilation 168 VIN see vehicle identification number 9 Voice activation system 26 W Warning and indicator lamps see Check Control 89 Warning displays see Check Control 89 Warning messages see Check Control 89 Warning triangle 238 Warranty 7 Washer fluid 82 Washer nozzles wind shield 81 Washer system 80 Washing vehicle 242 Water on roads 187 Weights 249 Welcome lamps during un locking 37 Welcome lights 104 Wheel base vehicle 248 Wheel cleaner 244 Wheels ch
179. habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ma terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re quired by law Temperature grade for this tire The temperature grade for this tire is es tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinfla tion or excessive loading either separately or
180. he desired page in the Owner s Manual 4 Press button again to return to last displayed function J Press button to return to the page of the Owner s Manual displayed last To alternate permanently between the last dis played function and the Owner s Manual re peat steps 4 amp 5 Opens a new display every time 30 Programmable memory buttons General information The Owner s Manual can be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons and called up di rectly Storing 1 Owner s Manual Select via the iDrive 2 g i Press selected button for more than 2 seconds Executing Press button The Owner s Manual is displayed im mediately Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Integrated Owner s Manual in the vehicle Ataglance a glance 31 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls This chapter is intended to provide you with information that will give you complete control of your vehicle All features and accessories that are useful for driving and your safety comfort and convenience are described here Controls Opening and closing Opening and closing Vehicle features and options Overview This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applie
181. he seat s area of movement unobstructed otherwise people might get injured or objects damaged lt Ata glance Front 63 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Adjusting Rear Storing 1 Switch on the ignition 2 Set the desired position 3 Press button The LED in the but ton lights up 4 Press selected button 1 or 2 while the LED is lit The LED goes out If the SET button is pressed accidentally SET J Press button again The LED goes out Calling up settings Comfort function 1 Open the driver s door 2 Switch off the ignition 3 Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2 The corresponding seat position is performed automatically The procedure stops when a reel for adjusting the seat or one of the buttons is pressed Safety mode 1 Close the driver s door or reel on the igni tion 2 Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2 until the adjustment procedure is com pleted 64 Calling up of a seat position deactivated After a brief period calling up stored seat posi tions is deactivated to save battery power To reactivate calling up of a seat position gt Open or close the door or trunk lid gt Press a button on the remote control gt Press the Start Stop button Mirrors Exterior mirrors General information The mirror on the passenger side is more curved than the driver s side mirror Depending on the vehicle equipme
182. herwise the protec tive effect can be lost lt Ensuring the stability of the child seat When installing child restraint systems make sure that the child seat is securely fas tened to the backrest of the seat Angle and headrest of the backrest might need to be ad justed or possibly be removed Make sure that all backrests are securely locked Otherwise the stability of the child seat can be affected and there is an increased risk of injury because Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Transporting children safely Controls of unexpected movement of the seat back rest lt On the front passenger seat Deactivating airbags Deactivating the front seat passenger airbags If a child restraint system is used in the front passenger seat deactivate the front seat pas senger airbags otherwise there is an in creased risk of injury to the child when the air bags are activated even with a child restraint system lt After installing a child restraint system in the front passenger seat make sure that the front knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated Deactivate the front seat passenger airbags automatically refer to page 111 Seat position and height Before installing a child restraint system move the front passenger seat as far back as possi ble and bring it up to medium height to obtain the best possible position for the belt and to offer optimal protection in the
183. i cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle ahead of you The distance that the vehicle maintains to the vehicle ahead of you can be varied For safety reasons it depends on the speed To maintain a certain distance the system au tomatically reduces the speed applies the brakes lightly or accelerates again if the vehi cle ahead begins moving faster If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt and then proceeds to drive again within a brief pe riod the system is able to detect this within the given system limits Your own vehicle will brake automatically and then accelerate again If the vehicle ahead of you drives away again after a prolonged period briefly press the ac celerator pedal or press the appropriate button to reactivate the system The vehicle will auto matically accelerate 144 As soon as the road is clear the vehicle accel erates to the desired speed The speed is also maintained downhill but may not be maintained uphill if engine power is insufficient General information Depending on the driving settings the features of the cruise control can change in certain areas Hints Personal responsibility Even an active system holds the driver responsible for his or her driving particularly for staying in your lane adjusting your speed keeping your distance and for your driving style all in relation to traffic Technically the system has its limits it cannot independently react to
184. ical in nature and is used to detect and correct faults and to opti mize vehicle functions Motion profiles over routes traveled cannot be created from this data When service offerings are used e g re pair services service processes warranty claims quality assurance this technical infor mation can be read out from the event and fault memories by the service personnel in Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Notes ss cluding the manufacturer using special diag nostic tools You can obtain further information there if you need it After an error is corrected the information in the fault memory is deleted or overwritten on a continuous basis With the vehicle in use there are situations where you can associate these technical data with individuals if combined with other infor mation e g an accident report damage to the vehicle eye witness accounts possibly with the assistance of an expert Additional functions that are contractually agreed with the customer such as vehicle emergency locating you can transmit certain vehicle data from the vehicle Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data re corder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situa tions such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in under standing how a vehicle s systems performed The EDR is designed to record data rel
185. icle on streets with lane markings is about to leave the lane This speed depending on the country version is between 35 mph 55 km h and 45 mph 70 km h When switching on the system below this speed a message is displayed in the instru ment cluster The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in the event of warnings The time of the warning may vary depending on the current driving sit uation The system does not provide a warning if the turn signal is set before leaving the lane Hints Personal responsibility The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver s personal judgment of the course of the road and the traffic situation In the event of a warning do not jerk the steer ing wheel as you may lose control of the vehi cle lt At a glance Button in the vehicle S Lane departure warning 4 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Safety Controls Camera ae i iat The camera is found near the interior rearview mirror Keep the windshield in the area behind the in terior rearview mirror clean and clear PARAS on off SPE Press button 7 4 gt On the LED lights up gt Off the LED goes out Settings are stored for the profile currently in use Display in the instrument cluster gt Lines system is activated gt Arrows at least one lane marking was detected and warnings can be issued Display in the instrument display g
186. ightly The warning stops when the turn signal is switched off or the other vehicle leaves the critical zone System limits The system may not be fully functional in the following situations gt When a vehicle is approaching at a speed much faster than your own gt In heavy fog rain or snowfall In tight curves or on narrow lanes gt If the bumper is dirty or iced up or covered with stickers A Check Control message is displayed when the system is not fully functional For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC Federal Communication Safety Commission regulations Operation is gov erned by the following FCC ID gt NBGOO9014A Compliance statement This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions gt This device may not cause harmful inter ference and gt this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Brake force display The concept i gt During normal brake application the outer brake lights light up gt During heavy brake application the inner brake lights light up in addition Active Protection General information The Active Protection safety package consists of systems that are
187. ility The High beam Assistant cannot serve as a Substitute for the driver s personal judg ment of when to use the high beams There fore manually reel off the high beams in situa tions where required to avoid a safety risk lt Activating 1 Depending on the equipment turn the light switch into position ZD or 2 2 Press button on the turn signal lever ar row _ The indicator lamp in the instrument 4 cluster lights up When the low beams are on the lights are au tomatically brightened or dimmed The system responds to light from oncoming traffic and traffic driving ahead of you and to adequate illumination e g in towns and cities The blue indicator lamp in the instru ment cluster lights up when the system switches on the high beams Depend ing on the version of the system in the vehicle the high beams may not switch off for oncom ing vehicles but may only be dimmed in the areas that blind oncoming traffic In this case the blue indicator light will stay on Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Lights Controls Switching the high beams on and off manually ey gt High beams on arrow 1 gt High beams off headlight flasher arrow 2 The High beam Assistant can be switched off when manually adjusting the light To reacti vate the High beam Assistant press the but ton on the turn signal lever System limits The system is not fully functional in situations su
188. ing Monitor closing to ensure that no one becomes trapped Touch the surface on the handle of a vehicle door arrow with your finger and hold it there without grasping the door handle This corresponds to pressing and holding the remote control button In addition to locking the windows and the glass sunroof close and the exterior mirrors fold in Separately unlocking the trunk lid Press button on the exterior of the trunk lid This corresponds to pressing the re mote control button The situation of the doors does not change Do not place the remote control in the cargo area Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area otherwise the re mote control is locked inside the vehicle when the trunk lid is closed Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Opening and closing Controls Opening and closing trunk lid with no touch activation The trunk lid can be opened with no touch ac tivation using the remote control you are carry ing With automatic tailgate operation it can also be closed with no touch activation Two sensors detect a forward directed foot motion in the center of the area at the rear of the car and the trunk lid opens and or closes Foot movement to be carried out Do not touch vehicle With the foot motion make sure there is steady stance and do not touch the vehicle otherwise there is a danger of injury e g from hot exhaust syst
189. ing on the gas pedal also in Personal responsibility terrupts automatic braking After coming to a halt the brake is released automatically Secure the vehicle against roll ing The system cannot possibly serve as a substitute for the driver s personal judgment of the traffic situation The system may not al ways detect critical situations reliably and ina timely manner Adapt speed to traffic situation and drive alertly otherwise a risk to safety may result Function After the safety belt is buckled the front belts are automatically pretensioned once after the vehicle is driven is away In critical driving situations the following indi vidual functions become active as needed gt The front belts are automatically preten sioned Automatic closing of the windows gt Automatic closing of the glass sunroof Automatic Positioning of the backrest for the front passenger seat gt For vehicles equipped with Comfort Seats in the rear automatic positioning of the backrests for the rear passenger seats After a critical driving situation without an acci dent the front belts are loosened again All other systems can be restored to the desired setting If the belt tension does not loosen automati cally stop the vehicle and unbuckle the belt using the red button in the buckle Fasten the belt before continuing on your trip PostCrash In the event of an accident the system can bring the car to a halt a
190. ing steam jets or high pressure washers hold them a sufficient distance away and use a maximum temperature of 140 F 60 C If the vehicle has a glass sunroof ensure that a distance of at least 31 5 inches 80 cm is main tained Holding them too close or using exces sively high pressures or temperatures can cause damage or preliminary damage that may then lead to long term damage Follow the user s manual for the high pressure washer lt 242 Cleaning sensors camera lenses with high pressure washers When using high pressure washers do not spray the sensors and camera lenses on the outside of the vehicle for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in 30 cm lt Automatic car washes Hints Note the following gt Give preference to cloth car washes or those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage gt Make sure that the wheels and tires are not damaged by the transport mechanisms gt Fold inthe exterior mirrors otherwise they may be damaged depending on the width of the vehicle gt Deactivate the rain sensor refer to page 81 to avoid unintentional wiper acti vation gt In some cases an unintentional alarm can be triggered by the interior motion sensor of the alarm system Follow the instruc tions on avoiding an unintentional alarm refer to page 48 Guide rails in car washes Avoid car washes with guide rails higher than 4 in 10 cm otherwise the vehicle body could
191. ing the human body s re sistance Front knee and side airbag on the front pas senger s side are either activated or deacti vated Leave feet in the footwell Make sure that the front passenger keeps his or her feet in the footwell otherwise proper functioning of the front passenger air bag might not be assured lt Child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat Before transporting a child on the front pas senger seat refer to the safety notes and in structions for children on the front passenger seat see Children lt Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system When transporting older children and adults the front seat passenger airbags may be deac tivated in certain sitting positions In this case the indicator lamp for the front seat passenger airbags lights up In this case change the sitting position so that the front seat passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out If it is not possible to activate the airbags have the person sit in the rear To enable correct recognition of the occupied seat cushion gt Do not attach covers cushions ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically recommended by your vehicle s manufacturer gt Do not place any electronic devices on the passenger Seat if a child restraint system is to be installed on it gt Do not place objects under the seat that could press against the seat from
192. ing the tires is not permissible on vehi cles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the front and rear axles Storage Store wheels and tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Always protect tires against all contact with oil grease and fuels Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres sure indicated on the side wall of the tire Run flat tires RSC label on the tire sidewall The wheels consist of tires that are self sup porting to a limited degree and possibly spe cial rims The support of the sidewall allows the tire to remain drivable to a restricted degree in the event of a tire inflation pressure loss Follow the instructions for continued driving with a flat tire 216 Changing run flat tires For your own safety only use run flat tires No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire Your service center will be glad to advise you Mobility System The concept With the Mobility System minor tire damage can be sealed quickly to enable continued travel To accomplish this sealant is pumped into the tires which seals the damage from the inside The compressor can be used to check the tire inflation pressure Hints gt Follow the instructions on using the Mobi lity System found on the compressor and sealant container gt Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec tive if the tire puncture measures approx 1 8 in 4 mm or more gt Conta
193. ingly reduced The rear wheels are turned to the same angle as the front wheels In critical situations Integral Active Steering can specifically steer the front and rear wheels to stabilize the vehicle before the driver inter venes e g when braking where road condi tions differ on the left and right sides of the ve hicle Initializing In rare cases it may become necessary to initi alize the Integral Active Steering The warning lamp lights up A Check Control message is displayed 1 With the engine running turn the steering wheel all the way to the left and right sev eral times in a uniform manner until the warning lamp disappears 140 2 Have the system checked if the warning lamp does not go out after moving the steering wheel approx 6 times or if the steering wheel is at an angle Using snow chains Note When snow chains are in use refer to page 219 rear wheel steering is deactivated Programs The system offers several different programs Select the programs via the Driving Dynamics Control refer to page 141 SPORT Consistently sporty tuning of the Integral Ac tive Steering for greater driving agility COMFORT Balanced tuning between the COMFORT and SPORT programs COMFORT Consistently comfort oriented tuning of the In tegral Active Steering for optimal traveling comfort Malfunction In the event of a malfunction the steering wheel must be turned further while th
194. ion 127 Night Vision device see Night Vision 127 Nylon rope for tow starting towing 240 O OBD Onboard Diagnosis 229 OBD see OBD Onboard Di agnosis 229 Object detection see Night Vision 127 Obstacle marking rearview camera 157 Octane rating refer to Rec ommended fuel grade 202 Odometer 94 258 Office see user s manual for Navigation Entertainment and Communication Oil 223 Oil adding 224 Oil additives 225 Oil change 225 Oil change interval service requirements 95 Oil filler neck 224 Oil types alternative 225 Oil types approved 225 Old batteries disposal 235 On board computer 98 Onboard monitor refer to Control Display 18 Onboard vehicle tool kit 230 Opening closing via door lock 39 Opening and closing 34 Opening and closing without remote control 39 Opening and closing with re mote control 37 Opening the trunk lid with no touch activation 45 Operating concept iDrive 18 Optional equipment standard equipment 6 Outside air refer to Auto matic recirculated air con trol 167 Overheating of engine refer to Coolant temperature 94 P Paint vehicle 243 Parallel parking assistant 161 Park Distance Control PDC 153 Parked car ventilation 171 Parked vehicle condensa tion 188 Parking aid refer to PDC 153 Parking assistant 161 Parking brake 75 Parking lights 104 Parking lights and roadside parking lights refer to Light emitting diodes LEDs 232 Parking wi
195. ion and the vehi cle s surroundings at all times otherwise acci dents are still possible despite all warnings lt Adapting your speed and driving style The displays and warnings of the system do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions Be alert Due to system limitations warnings may be not issued at all or may be issued late or improperly Therefore always be alert and ready to intervene otherwise there is the risk of an accident lt Tow starting and towing For tow starting or towing switch off the Intelligent Safety systems otherwise malfunc tions of the individual braking systems might lead to accidents lt 119 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 11 15 Controls Safety At a glance Button in the vehicle Intelligent Safety button Camera The camera is found near the interior rearview mirror Keep the windshield in the area behind the in terior rearview mirror clean and clear Switching on off Switching on automatically The system is automatically active after every driving off Switch off z Press button the system is switched Mmd off The LED goes out Re press button the system is switched on The LED lights up 120 Setting the warning time The warning time can be set via iDrive 1 Settings 2 Frontal Coll Warning 3 Activate the desired time on the Control Disp
196. ions in bar PSI with cold tires 245 50 R 18 100 V M S A S RSC 245 50 R 18 100 H M S RSC 245 45 R 19 102 V M S XL A S RSC 245 45 R 19 102 V M S XL RSC Front 245 45 R 19 98 Y RSC Rear 275 40 R 19 101 Y RSC Front 245 40 R 20 99 Y XL RSC Rear 275 35 R 20 102 Y XL RSC Pressure specifications in bar PSI RERE K D e 2 2132 2 4135 2 6 38 2 2132 23133 2 51 36 2 6 38 Tire size Pressure specifications in bar PSI Front 245 35 R21 2 8 41 96 Y XL RSC 30 44 Rear 275 30 R 21 98 Y XL RSC Emergency wheel Speed up to a max of T 135 80 R 18104 50 mph 80 km h M 4 2160 Tire inflation pressures at max speeds above 100 mph 160 km h Speeds above 100 mph 160 km h In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph 160 km h please observe and if necessary adjust tire pressures for speeds exceeding 100 mph 160 km h from the relevant table on the following pages Other wise tire damage and accidents could occur lt Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph 160 km h 7401 740Li 7501 750L1 Without high speed tuning feature Tire size Pressure specifications in bar PSI Specifications in bar PSI with cold REREAD tires en 245 50R18100V 2 2 32 2 6 38 M S A S RSC 245 50 R 18 100 H M S RSC 245 45R19102V 2 4 35 2 8 41 M S XL A S RSC 245 45 R 19 102 V M S XL RSC 209 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Mobility Wheels and tires Tire size
197. ires with the ambient temperature Only check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold This means after driving no more than 1 25 miles 2 km or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours The displays of inflation devices may under read by up to 1 45 psi O 1 bar For Flat Tire Monitor after correcting the tire inflation pressure reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor For Tire Pressure Monitor after correcting the tire inflation pressure reset the Tire Pressure Monitor Tire inflation pressure specifications The tire inflation pressure table refer to page 208 contains all tire inflation pressure specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ambient temperature Tire inflation pressure specifications apply to approved tire sizes and recommended tire brands This information can be obtained from your service center To identify the correct tire inflation pressure please note the following gt Tire sizes of your vehicle gt Maximum permitted driving speed Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph 160 km h For speeds of up to 100 mph 160 km h and for optimum driving comfort note the pressure values in the tire inflation pressure table refer to page 208 and adjust as necessary 207 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Mobility Wheels and tires Front 245 40 R20 2 4 35 99 Y XL RSC _ 26 38 Rear 275 35 R 20 102 Y XL RSC Front 245 35 R21 2 6 38 Y X
198. is unlocked using a remote con Empty battery in remote control trol the assigned personal profile will be acti gt Interference from radio transmissions vated All settings stored in the profile are au through mobile devices in close proximity tomatically applied to remote control If several drivers use their own remote control the vehicle will adjust the personal settings during unlocking These settings are also re 35 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Opening and closing stored if the vehicle has been used in the meantime by a person with a different remote control Changes to the settings are automatically saved in the personal profile Three personal profiles and a guest profile can be created Adjusting The settings for the following systems and functions are saved in the active profile The scope of storable settings is country and equipment dependable Unlocking and locking Lights Climate control Radio Instrument cluster Programmable memory buttons Volumes tone Control Display Navigation TV Park Distance Control PDC Rearview camera Side View Head up Display Driving Dynamics Control V yY yN VV OVY Vv Vv OV OY OV OVO V V Driver s seat position exterior mirror posi tion steering wheel position Cruise control Intelligent Safety Active Blind Spot Detection VV V OV Night vision 36 Profile management Opening profiles
199. ise this may cause engine damage Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Engine oil Mobility Protect children Keep oil grease etc out of reach of chil dren and observe the warnings on the contain ers to prevent health risks Engine oil types to add Hints No oil additives Oil additives may lead to engine dam age Viscosity grades for engine oils When selecting an engine oil ensure that the engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity grades SAE OW 40 SAE OW 30 SAE 5W 40 and SAE 5W 30 or malfunctions or engine damage may occur The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine Suitable engine oil types You can add engine oils that meet the follow ing oil rating standards Gasoline engine BMW Longlife 01 BMW Longlife 01 FE Diesel engine BMW Longlife 04 Further information regarding the oil specifica tions and viscosities of engine oils can be in quired with the service center Alternative engine oil types If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not available up to 1 US quart liter of an en gine oil with the following oil rating can be added Gasoline engine API SM or superior oil rating Diesel engine API CJ 4 Engine oil change The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you let the service center change the motor oil BMW recommends Original BMW Engine Oil 225 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 11 15 Cool
200. ise surfaces can be af fected 245 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 Reference This chapter contains the technical data and an index that will quickly take you to the information you need Reference Technical data Technical data Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to Note The technical data and specifications in this Owner s Manual are used as guidance values The vehicle specific data can deviate from this for example due to the selected special equip ment country version or country specific measurement method Detailed values can be Dimensions The dimensions can vary depending on the model version equipment or country specific measurement method The specified heights do not take into account attached parts for example a roof antenna BMW 7 Series Sedan Width with mirrors Width without mirrors Height Height L models Length Length L models Wheelbase Wheelbase L models Smallest turning radius diam Smallest turning radius diam L models 248 the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and sy
201. isplay M Press button 2 Split screen Selecting the display On the Control Display Press button 2 Split screen 3 Move the controller until the split screen is selected 4 Press the controller or select Split screen content 5 Select the desired menu item Split screen content LY Split screen Map facing north Map direction of travel Map perspective view Position v Onboard info Trip computer Programmable memory buttons General information The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons and called up di rectly e g radio stations navigation destina tions phone numbers and menu entries Settings are stored for the profile currently in use Saving a function 1 Highlight the function via the iDrive 2 198 Press and hold the desired button until a signal sounds Running a function Press button E The function will work immediately This means e g that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected Displaying the button assignment Touch buttons with bare fingers Do not wear gloves or use objects The key assignment is displayed at top edge of screen Telephone Navigation ConnectedDrive Vehicle info Settings Deleting the button assignments 1 Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for approx five seconds 2 OK 23 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Ataglance GEIE U E iDrive
202. isplay The concept The engine oil level is monitored electronically while driving and shown on the Control Dis play If the engine oil level reaches the minimum level a check control message is displayed Requirements A current measured value is available after ap prox 30 minutes of driving During a shorter trip the status of the last sufficiently long trip is displayed With frequent short distance trips regularly perform a detailed measurement Displaying the engine oil level On the Control Display 1 Vehicle info 2 Vehicle status 3 QZ Engine oil level Engine oil level display messages Different messages appear on the display de pending on the engine oil level Pay attention to these messages If the engine oil level is too low within the next 125 miles 200 km Add engine oil refer to page 224 Engine oil level too low Add engine oil immediately otherwise an insufficient amount of engine oil could re sult in engine damage lt Take care not to add too much engine oil Too much engine oil Have the vehicle checked immediately otherwise surplus engine oil can lead to en gine damage lt 223 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Mobility Engine oil Detailed measurement The concept In the detailed measurement the engine oil level is checked and displayed via a scale Gasoline engine If the engine oil level reaches the minimum level a check contr
203. istance and the parking Hints brake releases audibly Do not adjust the exterior mirrors Do not adjust the exterior mirror while driving and when turn signals hazard warning flashers are on or else the additional turn sig nal lights in the exterior mirror are out of posi tion and can t be seen Using turn signals After a power failure Only put the parking brake into operation after a power failure The parking brake should only be put into op eration again if it was manually released due to an interruption in the supply of electrical power Otherwise it cannot be ensured that the parking brake will function properly Press the lever beyond the resistance point To switch off manually press the lever to the Putting the parking brake into resistance point prt ton a Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp 1 Switch on the ignition indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed 2 Press the reel while stepping on the Triple turn signal activation brake pedal or selector lever position P is Press the lever to the resistance point set The turn signal flashes three times The function can be activated or deactivated 79 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Driving On the Control Display Switching on 1 Settings 2 Lighting 3 Triple turn signal Settings are stored for the profile currently in use Signaling briefly Press the lever to the resistance point and hol
204. itch off Deactivated or interrupted system With deactivated or interrupted system use your brakes steering and moves as usual to avoid the chance of an accident ka Press button on the steering wheel gt If active press twice gt If interrupted press once The displays go out The stored desired speed is deleted Interrupting ko When active press the button The system is automatically interrupted if gt The brakes are applied gt Selector lever position D is disengaged gt DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated or DSC is deactivated gt DSC is actively controlling stability HDC is activated gt When SPORT is activated with Driving Dynamics Control 151 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Driving comfort Maintaining storing and changing the speed Hints Adjusting the desired speed Modify desired speed to road conditions and be ready to brake at all times otherwise there is the risk of an accident lt Maintaining storing the speed Press button Or A Press the rocker switch while the system is in terrupted SE When the system is switched on the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed This is displayed refer to page 152 in the speedometer and briefly in the instrument cluster When cruise control is maintained or stored DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be turned on if needed Changing the
205. ity Care Otherwise particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds and lead to increased wear and premature degradation of the leather surface To guard against discoloration such as from clothing provide leather care roughly every two months Clean light colored leather more frequently be cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially more visible Use leather care products otherwise dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective layer of the leather surface Suitable care products are available from the service center Upholstery material care Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner If upholstery is very dirty e g with beverage stains use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner Clean the upholstery down to the seams using large sweeping motions Avoid rubbing the material vigorously Damage from Velcro fasteners Open Velcro fasteners on pants or other articles of clothing can damage the seat covers Ensure that any Velcro fasteners are closed lt Caring for special components Light alloy wheels When cleaning the vehicle use only neutral wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9 Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets above 140 F 60 C Follow the manufac turer s instructions Aggressive acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can destroy the protective layer of adjacent components such as the brake disk 244 Chrome surfac
206. k 134 A recommendation to take a break is displayed only once during an uninterrupted trip After a break another recommendation to take a break cannot be displayed until after approxi mately 45 minutes System limits The function may be limited in the following situations for instance and will either output an incorrect warning or no warning at all gt When the clock ts set incorrectly gt When the vehicle speed is mainly below about 43 mph 70 km h gt With a sporty driving style such as during rapid acceleration or when cornering fast gt Inactive driving situations such as when changing lanes frequently When the road surface is poor gt Inthe event of strong side winds PreCrash The concept With this system critical driving situations that might result in an accident can be detected above a speed of approx 20 mph 30 km h In these situations preventive measures are au tomatically taken to minimize the risk of an ac cident as much as possible Critical driving situations may include gt Emergency stop gt Severe understeering gt Severe oversteering If the vehicle includes the front end collision warning or front end collision warning with braking feature impending collisions with vehi cles driving ahead or stopped in front of you can also be detected within the system s range Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Safety Controls Note braking Destepp
207. l Vehicle info Quick reference Search by pictures v Owners Manual Onboard info Trip computer Vehicle status a aa Leafing through the Owner s Manual Page by page with link access Turn the controller until the next or previous page is displayed Page by page without link access Scroll through the pages directly while skip ping the links Highlight the symbol once Now simply press the controller to browse from page to page Scroll back Scroll forward 29 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Ataglance eMelreliasm integrated Owner s Manual in the vehicle Context help Owner s Manual to the temporarily selected function You may open the relevant information di rectly Opening via the iDrive To move directly from the application on the Control Display to the Options menu ERAN 1 Press button or move the controller to the right repeatedly until the Options menu is displayed 2 Display Owner s Manual Opening when a Check Control message is displayed Directly from the Check Control message on the Control Display Display Owner s Manual Changing between a function and the Owner s Manual To reel from a function e g radio to the Owner s Manual on the Control Display and to alternate between the two displays OPTION Press button or move the controller to the right repeatedly until the Options menu is displayed 2 Display Owner s Manual 3 Select t
208. lable in a certain speed range A proactively driving style helps the driver to use the function as often as possible and sup ports the fuel conserving effect of coasting Safety mode The function is not available under one of the following conditions gt DSC OFF or TRACTION activated gt Driving in the dynamic limit range and on steep uphill or downhill grades gt Battery charge status temporarily too low or vehicle electrical system drawing exces sive current gt Cruise control activated Functional requirements In ECO PRO mode this function is available in a speed range from approximately 30 mph ap prox 50 km h to 100 mph approx 160 km h if the following conditions are met gt Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not operated gt The selector lever is in selector lever posi tion D Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Saving fuel Drivingtips tips gt Engine and transmission are at operating 2 EfficientDynamics temperature 3 4 EfficientDynamics info The driving status Coast can be influenced with the shift paddles Deactivating the system manually The function can be deactivated in the Config Display ure ECO PRO refer to page 194 menu e g to use the braking effect of the engine when trav Display in the instrument cluster eling downhill The mark in the efficiency dis play below the tachometer is backlit in blue and is located at g the zero point The
209. lay 1 Settings 2 Climate 3 Activate comf ventilation The symbol on the automatic climate con trol flashes if the system is switched on The system continues to run for some time af ter being switched off Preselecting the reel on time On the Control Display Settings Climate Timer 1 or Timer 2 S W w oa Set the desired time Activating the reel on time On the Control Display 1 Settings 2 Climate 3 Activate timer 1 or Activate timer 2 amp The symbol on the automatic climate con trol lights up when the reel on time is acti vated amp The symbol on the automatic climate con trol flashes when the system has been switched on The system will only be switched on within the next 24 hours After that it needs to be reacti vated 171 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Interior equipment Interior equipment Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Universal Integrated Remote Control The concept The universal garage door opener can operate u
210. lay The selected time is stored for the profile cur rently in use Warning with braking function Display If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi nent a warning symbol appears in the instru ment cluster and in the Head Up Display Symbol Measure The vehicle lights up red prewarn ing Brake and increase distance The vehicle flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds acute warn ing You are requested to intervene by braking or make an evasive maneu ver BD D Prewarning This warning Is issued e g when there is the impending danger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small The driver must intervene actively when there is a prewarning Acute warning with braking function Warning of the imminent danger of a collision when the vehicle approaches another object at a relatively high differential speed The driver must intervene actively when there is an acute warning If necessary the driver is assisted by a minor automatic braking inter vention in a possible risk of collision Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Safety Controls Acute warnings can also be triggered without previous prewarning Braking intervention The warning prompts the driver himself herself to react During a warning the maximum brak ing force is used Premise for the brake boos ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on the brake pedal The system can assist with
211. lerator pedal After the engine starts accelerate as usual Safety mode After the engine switches off automatically it will not start again automatically if any one of the following conditions are met gt The driver s safety belt is unbuckled and the driver s door is open Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Driving Controls gt The hood was unlocked Some indicator lights light up for a varied length of time The engine can only be started via the Start Stop button Functional limitations Even if driving off was not intended the deacti vated engine starts up automatically in the fol lowing situations gt Excessive warming of the car s interior when the cooling function is switched on gt The steering wheel is turned Steptronic transmission change from se lector lever position D to R N or M S gt Steptronic transmission change from se lector lever position P to N D R or M S gt Fogging of the windows when the auto matic climate control is switched on gt Vehicle battery is heavily discharged Excessive cooling of the car s interior when the heating is switched on Activating deactivating the system manually Using the button gt LED comes on Auto Start Stop function is deactivated The engine is started during an automatic engine stop The engine can only be stopped or started via the Start Stop button gt LED goes out Auto Start Stop fu
212. longer displayed Charging the battery General information Make sure that the battery is always suffi ciently charged to guarantee that the battery remains usable for its full service life The battery may need to be charged in the fol lowing cases gt When making frequent short distance drives gt If the vehicle is not used for prolonged pe riods longer than a month Hints Do not connect charging devices to the 12 volt socket in the vehicle Do not connect battery chargers to the fac tory installed 12 volt sockets in the vehicle as this may damage the vehicle battery due to an increased power consumption lt Starting aid terminals In the vehicle only charge the battery via the starting aid terminals refer to page 239 in the engine compartment with the engine off Power failure After a temporary power loss some equipment needs to be newly initialized or individual set tings updated e g gt Seat mirror and steering wheel memory store the positions again gt Time update Date update gt Glass sunroof initialize the system refer to page 52 Disposing of old batteries Ry Have old batteries disposed of by your service center or bring them to a recy cling center 235 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Mobility Replacing components Maintain the battery in an upright position for Information on the fuse types and locations is transport and storage Sec
213. ls Front end collision warning Depending on the equipment the collision warning system consists of one of the two sys tems gt Front end collision warning with City Brak ing function refer to page 119 gt Front end collision warning with braking function refer to page 121 Front end collision warning with City Braking function The concept The ystem can help prevent accidents If an accident cannot be prevented the system will help reduce the collision speed The system sounds a warning before an immi nent collision and actuates brakes independ ently if needed The automatic braking intervention is done with limited force and duration A camera in the area of the rearview mirror controls the system The front end collision warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated With the vehicle approaching another vehicle intentionally the collision warning is delayed avoiding false alarm General information The system warns at two levels of an imminent danger of collision at speeds from approx 3 mph 5 km h Time of warnings may vary with the current driving situation Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to 35 mph 60 km h Detection range It responds to objects if they are detected by the system Hints Personal responsibility The system does not serve as a substi tute for the driver s personal judgment of the traffic situation Be aware of the traffic situat
214. ls for a fraction of a second Pedestrian and animal detection Object detection and warning only functions in darkness Warm objects that are similar in shape to hu man beings are detected by the system In addition the system also detects animals above a certain minimum size e g deer With heat image activated on the Control Dis play People detected by the system are displayed with a slight yellow hue Animals detected by the system are displayed in a darker yellow Under good ambient conditions the object de tection operates within the following distance ranges gt Pedestrian detection up to approx 330 ft 100 m 127 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Safety gt Detection of large animals up to approx 490 ft 150 m gt Detection of medium animals up to ap prox 230 ft 70 m Environmental influences can limit the availa bility of object detection If the vehicle systems detect that the vehicle is located in a residential area the animal detec tion is temporarily switched off Hints Personal responsibility Night Vision cannot replace the driver s personal judgment of the visibility conditions and the traffic situation The view ahead and the actual visibility conditions must always be the basis on which the vehicle speed is ad justed otherwise there is a risk to road safety Overview Buttons in the vehicle Intelligent Safety button Switch on
215. lso describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Fuel recommendation Note General fuel quality Even fuels that conform to the specifica tions can be of low quality This may cause en gine problems for instance poor engine start up behavior poor handling and or poor performance Switch gas stations or use a brand name fuel with a higher octane rating Gasoline For the best fuel efficiency the gasoline should be sulfur free or very low in sulfur con tent Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con taining metal must not be used Refuel only with unleaded gasoline with out metallic additives Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gaso line with metallic additives e g manganese or iron as this can cause permanent damage to the catalytic converter and other compo nents lt Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 10 i e E10 may be used for refueling 202 Ethanol should satisfy the following quality standards US ASTM 4806 xx CAN CGSB 3 511 xx xx comply with the current standard in each case Do not use a fuel with a higher percent age of ethanol Do not use a fuel with a higher ethanol per centage than recommended or one with other
216. ly unlocked The hazard warning system and interior lights come on Unlocking and opening gt Press the central locking system button to unlock the doors together and then pull the door handle above the armrest gt On the door to be opened pull the door handle twice the first time unlocks the door the second time opens it The other doors remain locked Doors Automatic Soft Closing To close the doors push lightly It is closed automatically Danger of jamming Make sure that the closing path of the doors is clear otherwise injuries may result Trunk lid Opening During opening the trunk lid pivots back and up Ensure that adequate clearance is available before opening Opening from the outside a gt Press button on the trunk lid Press button on the remote con trol for approx 1 second As the case may be the doors are also un locked Unlocking with the remote control refer to page 38 The trunk lid opens Opening from the inside With the vehicle is stationary press the button in the driver s footwell The trunk lid opens Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Manual release All of the vehicle s keys fit the trunk lid lock lo cated in the license plate recess Turn the key all the way to the left The trunk lid unlocks To avoid locking yourself out of the vehicle do not place the key or remote control in the trunk The trunk lid is lo
217. man The warning area for the pedestrian warning consists of two parts gt Central area arrow 1 directly in front of the vehicle gt Expanded area arrow 2 to the right and left With animal warnings no distinction is made between the central or expanded area The entire area moves along with the vehicle in the direction of the steering angle and changes with the vehicle speed As the vehicle speed increases the area becomes longer and wider e g Prewarning The yellow symbol is displayed when a person in the extended area is moving from the right or left towards the central area The yellow symbol is displayed when a person is detected in the central area immediately in front of the vehicle The displayed symbol can vary with the people detected Intervene actively by braking or make an eva sive maneuver When animals are detected an animal ADS symbol is displayed The symbol also shows the side of the road on which the animal was detected Intervene actively by braking or make an evasive maneuver Acute warning r The red symbol is displayed and a sig AAN nal sounds With instrument display The red sym bol is displayed and a signal sounds When animals are detected an red animal symbol is displayed with the signal tone A A Intervene immediately by braking or make an evasive maneuver Red symbol in the instrument cluster Red symbol in the instrument display
218. me 1 Settings 2 Time Date 3 Time 4 Turn the controller until the desired hours are displayed on Press the controller 6 Turn the controller until the desired mi nutes are displayed 7 Press the controller The time is stored Setting the time format 1 Settings 2 Time Date 3 Format 4 Select the desired format The time format is stored Automatic time setting Depending on your vehicle s optional features the time date and if needed the time zone are updated automatically 1 Settings 2 Time Date 3 Auto time set Date Setting the date 1 Settings 2 Time Date 3 Date 4 Turn the controller until the desired day is displayed 5 Press the controller 6 Make the necessary settings for the month and year The date is stored Setting the date format 1 Settings 2 Time Date 3 Format 4 Select the desired format The date format is stored Language Setting the language To set the language on the Control Display Settings Language Units Language oe E T Select the desired language Settings are stored for the profile currently in use Setting the voice dialog Voice dialog for the voice activation system refer to page 27 Units of measure Setting the units of measure To set the units for fuel consumption route distance and temperature Settings Language Units Select the desired menu item
219. mends that you have the oil changed at your BMW dealer s service cen ter or at another service center that has trained personnel that can perform the work in accordance with BMW specifications At page 228 under the heading Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Addendum models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models the second paragraph should be disregarded and the following text read in lieu thereof The manufacturer of your vehicle recom mends that you have maintenance and repair performed by your BMW dealer s ser vice center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with BMW specifications The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you maintain records of all maintenance and repair work performed on your vehicle 20 At page 231 and page 232 where it reads Do not perform work bulb replacement on xenon headlights that text should be dis regarded and in lieu thereof the following text should be read Xenon headlight work or replacement can cause serious and fatal Injuries In the text that follows where it reads h ave any work on the xenon light ing system the following words should be read as preceding that passage It is strongly suggested that you 21 At page 235 under the
220. mum speed You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph 80 km h Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire 1 Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers 2 Donot exceed a speed of 50 mph 80 km h 3 Check the air pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized In this case initialize the system 113 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Safety Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on cargo load driv ing style and road conditions A vehicle with an average load has a possible driving range of approx 50 miles 80 km A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ ently e g it has reduced lane stability during braking a longer braking distance and different self steering properties Adjust your driving style accordingly Avoid abrupt steering ma neuvers or driving over obstacles e g curbs potholes etc Because the possible driving distance de pends on how the vehicle is used during the trip the actual distance may be shorter or lon ger depending on the driving speed road con ditions external temperature cargo load etc Continued driving with a flat tire Drive moderately and d
221. n the event of a flat tire Normal tires 1 Identify the damaged tire Do this by checking the air pressure in all four tires The tire pressure gage of the Mobility Sys tem refer to page 216 can possibly be used for this purpose 115 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Safety If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is shown to be correct it is possible that the Tire Pressure Monitor did not perform areset Then perform the reset If an identification is not possible please contact the service center 2 Fixing a flat tire where applicable with the Mobility System Use of tire sealant e g the Mobility System may damage the TPM wheel electronics In this case have the electronics checked at the next opportunity and have them replaced if needed Run flat tires Maximum speed You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph 80 km h Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire 1 Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers 2 Donot exceed a speed of 50 mph 80 km h 3 Check the air pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is shown to be correct it is possible that the Tire Pressure Monitor did not perform a reset In that case carry out a reset Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure The possible driving
222. n to ride on a passenger s lap lt Putting on the belt Lay the belt without twisting snugly across the lap and shoulders as close to the body as possible Make sure that the belt lies low around the hips in the lap area and does not press on the abdomen Otherwise the belt can slip over the hips in a frontal impact and in jure the abdomen The safety belt must not lie across the neck rub on sharp edges be routed over breakable objects or be pinched lt 59 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Adjusting What reduces the restraining effect Avoid wearing bulky clothing and pull the shoulder belt periodically to readjust the tension Make sure that the belt is not jammed otherwise the belt can be damaged and the restraining effect is reduced Buckling the belt Va Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle Tensioning the safety belt automatically When the belt is closed it is automatically tightened once after the release Unbuckling the belt 1 Hold the belt firmly 2 Press the red button in the belt buckle 3 Guide the belt back into its roll up mecha nism Safety belt reminder for driver s and passenger s seat AA The indicator lamp lights up and a sig nal sounds Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly The safety belt reminder is active at speeds above approx 6 mph 10 km h It can also be activated if objects are placed
223. nction is activated Switching off the vehicle during an automatic engine stop During an automatic engine stop the vehicle can be switched off permanently e g when leaving it 1 Press the Start Stop button The ignition is switched off The Auto Start Stop function is deactivated Selector lever position P is engaged auto matically 2 Set the parking brake Engine start as usual via Start Stop button Automatic deactivation In certain situations Auto Start Stop function is deactivated automatically for safety reasons as if the driver were absent Malfunction The Auto Start Stop function no longer switches off the engine automatically A Check Control message is displayed It is possible to continue driving Have the system checked Parking brake The concept The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi cle from rolling when it is parked 19 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Driving Ata glance Setting Apply parking brake and further secure the vehicle if needed Set the parking brake firmly when parking oth erwise the vehicle could roll On steep upward and downward inclines further secure the ve hicle e g by turning the steering wheel in the direction of the curb lt Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children e g can not release the parking brake lt ro Pull the reel
224. ncy Request not guaranteed For technical reasons the Emergency Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavor able conditions lt Overview SOS button in the roofliner Requirements gt The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has been activated gt The radio ready state is switched on The Assist system is functional Initiating an Emergency Request 1 Press the cover briefly to open it 2 Press the SOS button until the LED at the button lights up green gt The LED lights up green an Emergency Request was initiated If a cancel prompt appears on the display the Emergency Request can be aborted If the situation allows wait in your vehicle until the voice connection has been estab lished gt TheLED flashes green when a connection to the BMW Response Center has been established 237 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Mobility Breakdown assistance When the emergency request is received at the BMW Response Center the BMW Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you Even if you are unable to respond the BMW Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circum stances For this data are transmitted to the BMW Response Center which serve to deter mine the necessary rescue measures E g the current position of the vehicle if it can be established gt Ifthe LED is flashing green but the BMW Response Center can no longer be heard
225. ndently react to all traffic situations Monitor your driving be on the alert observe the vehicle surroundings and other traffic and react when needed risk of accident lt Changes to the parking space Changes to the parking space after it was measured are not taken into account by the system Therefore always be alert and ready to inter vene otherwise there is the risk of an acci dent lt Transporting cargo Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of the vehicle is not taken into account by the system during the parking procedure Therefore always be alert and ready to inter vene otherwise there is the risk of an acci dent Curbs The parking assistant may steer the vehi cle over or onto curb if need be Therefore always be alert and ready to inter vene otherwise the wheels tires or the vehi cle may become damaged An engine that has been switched off by the Auto Start Stop function is restarted automati cally when the parking assistant is activated Requirements For measuring parking spaces gt Maximum speed while driving forward ap prox 22 mph 35 km h 161 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Driving comfort gt Maximum distance to row of parked vehi cles 5 ft 1 5 m Suitable parking space gt Gap between two objects with a minimum length of approx 5 ft 1 5 m gt Min length of gap between two objects your vehicle s length plus approx
226. ne Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Climate control Controls Climate control Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the series It also describes features that are not respective features and systems necessarily available in your car e g due to Automatic climate control i 1 Air distribution left 11 Air distribution right 2 Temperature left 12 Seat heating right 56 3 AUTO program left 13 Active seat ventilation right 56 4 Airflow AUTO intensity left residual heat 14 Automatic recirculated air control recircu 5 Remove ice and condensation lated air mode 6 Maximum cooling 15 Cooling function 7 Display 16 Rear window defroster 8 Air flow AUTO intensity right 17 SYNC program 9 AUTO program right 18 Active seat ventilation left 56 10 Temperature right 19 Seat heating left 56 165 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Climate control Hints Sufficient ventilation When remaining in the vehicle for an ex tended period of time ensure sufficient exter nal ventilation Do not continuously use recir culated air mode otherwise the air quality in the interior continuously deteriorates and win dow condensation increases lt Climate control functions in detail Manual air distribution E
227. ne can be started 206 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Wheels and tires Mobility Wheels and tires Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Tire inflation pressure Safety information The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres sure influence the following gt The service life of the tires gt Road safety gt Driving comfort Checking the tire inflation pressure Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Regularly check the tire inflation pres sure and correct it as needed at least twice a month and before a long trip If you fail to ob serve this precaution you may be driving on tires with incorrect tire pressures a condition that may not only compromise your vehicle s driving stability but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an accident Tires have a natural consistent loss of tire in flation pressure Tires heat up while driving and the tire infla tion pressure increases along with the tire s temperature The tire inflation pressure speci fications relate to cold tires or t
228. ng on the intensity of the rainfall The sensor is located on the wind shield directly behind the interior rearview mir ror Activating deactivating Turn the thumbwheel Clean the windshield headlights Press button on the wiper lever Wiping is started If the vehicle is equipped with a rain sensor LED in wiper lever lights up When wipers are frozen to windshield wiper operation is deactivated Pull the wiper lever towards you During trip interruption with the rain sensor switched on if the trip is resumed within ap prox 15 minutes the rain sensor is automati cally activated again In addition the headlights are cleaned at regu l l lar intervals when the vehicle s lights are acti Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes vated The system sprays washer fluid on the wind shield and activates the wipers briefly Deactivate the rain sensor when passing through an automatic car wash otherwise un intentional wiping can cause damages lt Do not use the washer system at freezing temperatures Do not use the washers if fluid could freeze onto the windshield which might impede your viewing field Therefore use antifreeze fluid Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is empty operation might damage pump lt Windshield washer nozzles The windshield washer nozzles are automati cally heated while the ignition is switched on 81 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Co
229. not relieve the driver from personal responsibility while driving Technically the system has its limits it cannot independently react to all traffic situations Monitor your driving be on the alert observe the vehicle surroundings and other traffic and react when needed risk of accident Avoid driving fast with PDC Avoid approaching an object too fast Avoid driving off fast while PDC is not yet ac tive For technical reasons the system may other wise be too late in issuing a warning lt Overview With front PDC button in vehicle PDC Park Distance Control Switching on off Switching on automatically With the engine running engage lever in posi tion P R Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded 153 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Driving comfort Switch the system back on if needed With front PDC switching on off manually ry Press button PY gt On the LED lights up gt Off the LED goes out Display Signal tones When approaching an object an intermittent sound indicates the position of the object E g if an object is detected to the left rear of the vehicle a signal tone sounds from the left rear speaker The shorter the distance to the object the shorter the intervals If the distance to a detected object is less than approx 10 in 25 cm a
230. ns must be observed when using the respective features and systems Sitting safely The ideal seating position can make a vital contribution to relaxed fatigue free driving The seating position plays an important role in an accident in combination with gt Safety belts refer to page 59 gt Head restraints refer to page 60 gt Airbags refer to page 109 Front seats Hints Do not adjust the seat while driving Do not adjust the driver s seat while driv ing or the seat could respond with unexpected movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident lt Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear while driving or there is a risk of slipping under the safety belt in the event of an accident This would eliminate the protection normally pro vided by the belt Adjusting Keep the movement area unobstructed When changing the seat position keep the seat s area of movement unobstructed otherwise people might get injured or objects damaged lt Electrically adjustable seats Overview Thigh support Forward back height tilt Shoulder support Backrest width Lumbar support O 0O WN Backrest head restraint General information The seat setting for the driver s seat is stored for the profile currently in use When the vehi cle is unlocked via the remote control the po sition is automatically retrieved if the
231. ns of the remote control or using the integrated key refer to page 39 Adjusting Unlocking The settings are saved in the active profile re fer to page 35 Doors 1 Settings 2 Doors key 3 of Select the symbol 4 Select the desired function gt Driver s door only Only the driver s door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked Pressing again un locks the entire vehicle gt All doors 46 The entire vehicle is unlocked Trunk lid Depending on optional features and country version this setting is not offered in some cases 1 Settings 2 Doors key 3 gt Select the symbol 4 Select the desired function gt Tailgate The trunk lid is opened gt Tailgate door s The trunk lid is opened and the doors are unlocked Confirmation signals from the vehicle The settings are saved in the active profile re fer to page 35 1 Settings 2 Doors key 3 Deactivate or activate the desired confir mation signals gt Acoustic sig lock unlock gt Flash when lock unlock Automatic locking The settings are saved in the active profile re fer to page 35 _ Settings Nh Doors key 3 Select the desired function gt Lock if no door is opened The vehicle locks automatically after a short period of time if no door is opened gt Lock after start driving The vehicle locks automatically after you drive off Online Edition for Part no 0
232. ns their life If a bulb fails reel on the front fog lights and continue the trip with great care Comply with local regulations Do not perform work bulb replacement on xenon headlights Have any work on the xenon lighting system including bulb replacement performed only by a service center Due to the high voltage a present in the system there is a danger of fatal 2 Turn the lid and remove it injuries if work is carried out improperly lt 7 For checking and adjusting headlamp aim please contact your BMW center Light emitting diodes LEDs Follow general instructions refer to page 230 With Xenon headlights the following lights are designed with LED technology gt Parking lights and roadside parking lights Pulthaconnectorot ihe bulb a 4 Squeeze the wire bracket together and de gt Daytime running lights adi gt Turn signals incl side indicators Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction Turning lamp with the Xenon headlight Follow general instructions refer to page 230 The illustration shows the left side of the en gine compartment 5 Remove the bulb and replace it 6 Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in the reverse order 232 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 LED headlights At a glance Corner illuminating lights 1 2 High beams 3 Low beams daytime running lights 4 Turn signals parking lights daytime run
233. nstance might not be detected Limited detection potential Because of the limited possible detec tion you should be alert at all times so that you can intervene if needed otherwise there is the risk of an accident lt Deceleration The system does not decelerate for gt Pedestrians or similar slow moving road users gt Red traffic lights Cross traffic gt Oncoming traffic Swerving vehicles A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected until it is completely within the same lane as your vehicle Swerving vehicles If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly swerves into your lane the system may not be able to automatically restore the selected dis tance This also applies to major speed differ ences to vehicles driving ahead of you e g when rapidly approaching a truck When a ve hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out evasive maneu vers if needed You must react yourself other wise there is the risk of an accident 149 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Driving comfort Cornering Radar sensor For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC Federal Communication Commission regulations Operation is gov erned by the following FCC ID gt OAYARSS3 A Compliance statement If the desired speed is too high for a curve the
234. nt the mir ror setting is stored for the profile currently in use When the vehicle is unlocked via the re mote control the position is automatically re trieved if this function is active Note Estimating distances correctly Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear Do not estimate the distance to the traffic behind you based on what you see in the mirror as this will increase your risk of an accident Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Ata glance 1 Adjusting 65 2 Left right Automatic Curb Monitor 3 Foldinandout 65 Selecting a mirror To change over to the other mirror Slide the switch Adjusting electrically The setting corresponds to the direc tion in which the button is pressed Saving positions Seat mirror and steering wheel memory refer to page 63 Adjusting manually In case of electrical malfunction press edges of mirror Automatic Curb Monitor The concept If reverse gear is engaged the mirror glass on the front passenger side is tilted downward This improves your view of the curb and other low lying obstacles when parking e g Adjusting Activating 1 a Slide the switch to the driver s side mirror position 2 Engage selector lever position R Deactivating Slide the switch to the passenger side mirror position Fold in and out m Press button Possible at speeds up to approx 15 mph 20 km h E g this i
235. nt use light emitting diodes installed behind a cover as a light source These light emitting diodes which are related to conventional lasers are officially designated as Class 1 light emitting diodes Do not remove the covers Do not remove the covers and never stare into the unfiltered light for several hours otherwise irritation of the retina could result lt Headlight glass Condensation can form on the inside of the ex ternal lights in cool or humid weather When driving with the light switched on the conden sation evaporates after a short time The head light glass does not need to be changed If the headlights do not dim despite driving with the light switched on increasing humidity forms e g water droplets in the light have the service center check this Headlight setting The headlight adjustments can be affected by changing lights and bulbs Have the head lights settings checked and corrected by serv ice after a replacement Front lights bulb replacement Xenon headlights At a glance Corner illuminating lights Parking lamp daytime running lights Low beams high beams mh ON Turn signal Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Mobility Replacing components Hints 55 watt bulb H7 Because of the long life of these bulbs the 1 Open the folding cover in the engine com likelihood of failure is very low Switching the partment lights on and off frequently shorte
236. nterface is located in the center arm rest Rear cooler Note Immediately close cooler again Close the cooler immediately after use while driving otherwise injury may occur dur ing accidents lt Behind the center armrest The cooler is located behind the center arm rest in the rear Fold the center armrest down Opening Pull on the opener and fold the cooler forward Switching on The cooler can be operated at two levels 1 Switch on the ignition 2 Press button once for each cooling level The highest cooling power is active when two LEDs are lit If the cooler was switched on the last time the ignition was switched on it will likewise be switched on the next time the ignition is switched on Switch off Press button repeatedly until the LEDs go out Malfunction The cooler cannot be switched on or switches off e g when the cooling system overheats or if the battery voltage is low One of the LEDs flashes Remedy the problem 1 If necessary allow the refrigerator cooling system to cool down 2 Start the engine 3 Switch on cooler If the LED flashes even after a short time have the cooler checked by the service center 177 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Interior equipment Ski bag 5 Insert the tongue plate into the belt buckle Capacity The ski bag can be used to transport up to three pairs of skis with a length of up to 6 ft
237. ntrols Driving Fold out position of the wipers Fold wipers back when you want to change the blades or with pending low temperatures Switch the ignition on and off again 2 With icy conditions make sure that blades are not frozen to the windshield 3 Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of resistance and hold it for approx 3 sec onds until the wiper remains in a nearly vertical position After the wipers are folded back down the wiper system must be reactivated Folding wipers back down Before switching the ignition on fold the wipers back down to the windshield other wise the wipers may become damaged when they are activated 1 Switch on the ignition 2 Push wiper lever down Wipers move to their resting position and are ready again for operation Washer fluid Hints Antifreeze for washer fluid Antifreeze is flammable and can cause injury if it is used incorrectly Therefore keep it away from possible sources of ignition Only keep it in the closed original container and inaccessible to children Follow the notes and instructions on the con tainer United States The washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U S EPA and many individual states do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratios limits that apply Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid con 82 tainer Use BMW s Windshield Washer Con centrate or the equivalent Adding washer fluid Only
238. nts Personal judgment The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver s personal judgment of the traffic situation The system assists the driver and does not re place the human eye lt Ata glance Camera The camera is found near the interior rearview mirror Keep the windshield in the area behind the in terior rearview mirror clean and clear Switching on off On the Control Display 1 Settings 2 Instrument cluster 3 Speed limit information If speed limit detection is switched on it can be displayed on the info display in the instru ment cluster via the computer Display The following is displayed in the instrument cluster Displays Speed limit detection Speed limit detection is not available Speed limit detection can also be displayed in the Head up Display Current speed limit P System limits The system may not be fully functional and may provide incorrect information in the fol lowing situations gt In heavy fog rain or snowfall gt When signs are concealed by objects gt When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you When driving toward bright lights gt When the windshield behind the interior rearview mirror is fogged over dirty or cov ered by a sticker etc gt Inthe event of incorrect detection by the camera gt Ifthe speed limits stored in the navigation system are incorrect gt In areas not covered by the
239. number bars shows the selected A distance from the vehicle driving ahead For additional information refer to Active Cruise Control with Stop amp Go function ACC refer to page 144 Vehicle detection Active Cruise Control Illuminated vehicle driving ahead de tected Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Displays Controls Flashing the conditions are not adequate for operating the system The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively resume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal Yellow lights Anti lock Braking System ABS Avoid abrupt braking if possible Brak ing force boost in some cases defec tive Stop carefully Take into account longer brake travel Have this checked B i by the service center immediately oN DSC Dynamic Stability Control Flashing DSC controls the drive and braking forces The vehicle is stabi lized Reduce speed and adapt driving profile to the driving circumstances AD Illuminated DSC failed Have the system checked by the service center For additional information refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC refer to page 136 DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated amp Dynamic Stability Control DSC is Se switched off or Dynamic Traction Con trol DTC is switched on For additional information refer to Dynamic Stability Control refer t
240. nward inclines further secure the ve hicle e g by turning the steering wheel in the direction of the curb lt Before driving into a car wash So that the vehicle can roll into a car wash ob serve instructions for going into an automatic car wash refer to page 242 Switching off the engine 1 Engage transmission position P with the vehicle stopped 2 Press the Start Stop button The engine is switched off The radio ready state is switched on 3 Set the parking brake 73 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Driving Auto Start Stop function The concept The Auto Start Stop function helps save fuel The system switches off the engine during a stop e g in traffic congestion or at traffic lights The ignition remains switched on The engine starts again automatically for driving off Automatic mode After every start of the engine using the Start Stop button the Auto Start Stop function is in the last selected state refer to page 75 When the Auto Start Stop function is active it is available when the vehicle is traveling faster than about 3 mph approx 5 km h Engine stop The engine is switched off automatically dur ing a stop under the following conditions Steptronic transmission gt The selector lever is in selector lever posi tion D gt The brake pedal remains pressed while the vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is held by Automatic Hold gt Th
241. o matically Activating the status 1 Settings 2 Tire chains 3 Tire chains installed Automatic detection If functioning properly gt Snow chains are mounted Settings are not activated J After you drive a short distance a Check Control message is shown and the state is activated automatically Confirm the automatic activation gt Snow chains are not mounted Settings are activated FY At speeds above 30 mph 50 km h a Check Control message is displayed Deactivate the status manually If not functioning properly gt Snow chains are mounted Settings are not activated D A Check Control message is not displayed The automatic detection system is mal functioning Activate the status manually Activating deactivating rear axle steering If the status indicating that snow chains are in use Is activated the rear axle steering is deac tivated automatically At speeds above 30 mph 50 km h the rear axle steering is activated again even though snow chains are in use 220 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Engine compartment Mobility Engine compartment Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and sy
242. o On Board computer 98 Initialization Integral Active Steering 140 Initialize Tire Pressure Moni tor TPM 115 Initializing Flat Tire Monitor FTM 112 Instrument cluster 86 Instrument cluster electronic displays 86 Instrument display multifunc tional 87 Instrument lighting 107 Integral Active Steering 140 Integrated key 34 Integrated Owner s Manual in the vehicle 29 Intelligent Emergency Re quest 237 Intelligent Safety 117 Intensity AUTO pro gram 166 Interior equipment 172 Interior lights 107 Interior lights during unlock ing 37 Interior lights with the vehicle locked 38 Interior motion sensor 48 Interior rearview mirror auto matic dimming feature 66 Interior rearview mirror man ually dimmable 66 Internet page 6 Interval display service re quirements 95 Interval mode 81 J Jacking points for the vehicle jack 234 Joystick Steptronic transmis sion 83 Jump starting 238 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Everything from A to Z Reference K Key remote control 34 Keyless Go refer to Comfort Access 43 Key Memory refer to Per sonal Profile 35 Kickdown Steptronic trans mission 83 Knee airbag 110 L Lamp replacement rear 233 Lane departure warning 130 Lane margin warning 130 Language on Control Dis play 101 Lashing eyes securing cargo 190 LATCH child restraint sys tem 70 Leather care 243 LED front fog lights bulb re pl
243. o not exceed a speed of 50 mph 80 km h Your car handles differently when you lose tire inflation pressure e g your lane stability is re duced when braking braking distances are longer and the self steering properties will change lt Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of a tire Reduce speed and stop otherwise pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident Do not continue driving and contact your service center lt Tire Pressure Monitor TPM The concept The system monitors tire inflation pressure in the four mounted tires The system warns you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires For this purpose sensors in the 114 tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure and tire temperature Hints Tire damage due to external factors Sudden tire damage caused by external circumstances cannot be recognized in ad vance With use of the system observe further infor mation found under Tire inflation pressure re fer to page 207 Functional requirements The system must have been reset with the correct tire inflation pressure otherwise relia ble signaling of tire inflation pressure loss is not assured Reset the system after each adjustment of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change Always use wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the system will operate properly Status displ
244. o page 136 and Dy namic Traction Control refer to page 137 Flat Tire Monitor FTM The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of tire inflation pressure in a tire Reduce your speed and stop cautiously Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers For more information see Flat Tire Monitor re fer to page 112 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Illuminated the Tire Pressure Monitor signals a loss of tire inflation pressure in a tire Reduce your speed and stop cautiously Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers Flashing and then continuously illuminated no flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be detected gt Interference through systems or devices with the same radio frequency after leav ing the area of the interference the system automatically becomes active again gt TPM could not conclude the reset perform the reset of the system again gt A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted have the service center check it if needed gt Malfunction have the system checked by your service center For more information see Tire Pressure Moni tor refer to page 114 Steering system Steering system in some cases defec e tive Have the steering system checked by the service center Engine functions Have the vehicle checked by the serv ice center For additional information refer to On board Diagnostics socket refer to page 229 91 Online Edition for Part no 0
245. of Dynamic Damping Control gt Failure of DSC Dynamic Stability Control gt The vehicle has a flat tire gt When activating cruise control in TRAC TION or DSC OFF mode DSC OFF Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in curves Stabilizing interventions by the Integral Active Steering system are only performed by the rear axle steering To increase vehicle stability activate DSC again as soon as possible Deactivating DSC DSC OFF i Press and hold this button but not lon ger than approx 10 seconds until the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in strument cluster and displays DSC OFF The DSC system is switched off 141 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Driving stability control systems Activating DSC r Press button EA OFF DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator lamp go out Indicator warning lights When DSC OFF is activated DSC OFF is dis played in the instrument cluster amp The indicator lamp lights up DSC OFF os is activated TRACTION Maximum traction on loose road surfaces DTC Dynamic Traction Control is switched on Driv ing stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in curves Activating TRACTION A Press button EA OFF TRACTION is displayed in the instru ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up Deactivating TRACTION Press button again ER OFF i
246. of water can form between the tires and road surface This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan ing It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle Driving through water Observe water level and speed Do not exceed the maximum water level and maximum speed otherwise the vehicle s engine the electrical systems and the trans mission may be damaged lt Drive though calm water only and only if it is not deeper than 9 8 inches 25 cm and at this height no faster than walking speed up to 3 mph 5 km h 187 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Driving tips Braking safely Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand ard feature Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations needed Steering is still responsive You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef fort Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active mode In certain braking situations the perforated brake discs can cause functional problems However this has no effect on the perform ance and operational reliability of the brake Objects within the range of movement of the pedals No objects in the area around the pedals Keep floor mats carpets and any other objects out of the pedal area otherwi
247. off gt When opening or closing the driver door if the driver s safety belt is unbuckled and the low beams are turned off gt While the driver s safety belt is unbuckled with driver s door open and low beams off The low beams switch to parking lights after approx 15 minutes of no use Radio ready state Activate radio ready state gt When the engine is running press the Start Stop button Some electronic systems power consumers remain ready for operation The radio ready state switches off automati Cally gt After approx 8 minutes gt When the vehicle is locked using the cen tral locking system gt Shortly before the battery is discharged completely so that the engine can still be started Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Driving Controls The radio ready state remains active if e g the ignition is automatically switched off for the following reasons gt Opening or closing the driver s door gt Unfastening of the driver s safety belt gt When automatically switching from low beams to parking lights If the engine is switched off and the ignition is switched on the system automatically switches to the radio ready state if the lights are turned off or if correspondingly equipped the daytime running lights are activated Starting the engine Hints Enclosed areas Do not let the engine run in enclosed areas since breathing in exhaust fumes may lead to lo
248. oil 93 Terminal starting aid 239 Text message supplemen tary 92 Theft alarm system refer to Alarm system 47 Theft protection lug bolts 234 Thermal camera see Night Vision 127 Thigh support 54 Tilt alarm sensor 48 Time of arrival 99 Tire damage 214 Tire identification marks 212 Tire inflation pressure 207 Tire inflation pressure moni tor refer to FTM 112 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 114 Tires changing 214 Tire sealant 216 Tires everything on wheels and tires 207 Tires run flat tires 216 Tire tread 214 Tone see user s manual for Navigation Entertainment and Communication Tool 230 Top View 159 Total vehicle weight 249 Touchpad 21 Tow fitting 240 Towing 240 Tow lug see Tow fitting 240 Tow starting 240 TPM Tire Pressure Moni tor 114 Traction control 137 TRACTION driving dynam ics 137 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Everything from A to Z Reference TRACTION program Dy namic Driving Control 142 Transmission lock electronic unlocking 85 Transmission see Steptronic transmission 83 Transporting children safely 68 Tread tires 214 Trip computer 99 Triple turn signal activa tion 79 Trip odometer 94 Trunk lid automatic 41 Trunk lid closing 41 Trunk lid closing with no touch activation 45 Trunk lid emergency unlock ing 43 Trunk lid hotel function 43 Trunk lid manual opera tion 41 Trunk lid opening 40 Trunk lid opening wit
249. ol condensation water refer to page 188 devel ops that exits underneath the vehicle Rear window defroster Press button The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time SYNC program SYNC The current settings on the driver s side for temperature air flow air distri bution and AUTO program are transferred to the front passenger side and to the left and right rear The program is switched off if the settings on the front passenger side or in the rear are changed 167 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Climate control Residual heat The heat stored in the engine is used to heat the interior Functional requirement gt Upto 15 minutes after switching off the engine gt Warm engine gt The battery is sufficiently charged gt External temperature below 77 F 25 C The availability of the function is shown on the display of the automatic climate control Switching on 1 Switch off the ignition F l 2 Press the right side of the button on the driver s side if The symbol appears on the automatic cli mate Control Display The interior temperature air volume and air distribution can be adjusted with the ignition switched on Switch off At the lowest fan speed press the left side of the button on the driver s side The symbol on the display of the automatic climate control flashes Switching the syst
250. ol message is displayed Diesel engine If the engine oil level reaches the minimum level or an overfilling is detected a check con trol message is displayed During the measurement the idle speed is in creased somewhat General information A detailed measurement is only possible with certain engines Requirements gt Vehicle is on level road gt Steptronic transmission selector lever in selector lever position N or P and accelera tor pedal not depressed gt Engine is running and is at operating tem perature Performing a detailed measurement In order to perform a detailed measurement of the engine oil level 1 Vehicle info 2 Vehicle status 3 SY Measure engine oil level 4 Start measurement The engine oil level is checked and displayed via a scale Time approx 1 minute 224 Adding engine oil General information Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehi cle before engine oil is added lap oS ya ee N ZS ZA When the flap is closed it must latch Oil filler neck Only add engine oil when the message is dis played in the instrument cluster The quantity to be added is indicated in the message dis played in the instrument cluster Adding engine oil Add oil within the next 125 miles 200 km otherwise this may cause engine damage Do not add too much engine oil When too much engine oil is added im mediately have the vehicle checked otherw
251. on Once synchroni zation is complete the programmed func tion will be carried out Reprogramming individual buttons 1 Switch on the ignition 2 Press and hold the interior rearview mirror button to be programmed 3 Assoon as the interior rearview mirror LED starts flashing slowly hold the hand held transmitter for the system to be controlled approx 1 to 3 in 2 5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of the interior rearview mirror The required distance depends on the manual transmitter 173 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Interior equipment 4 Likewise press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand held trans mitter 5 Release both buttons as soon as the inte rior rearview mirror LED flashes more rap idly The LED flashing faster indicates that the button on the interior rearview mirror has been programmed The system can then be controlled by the button on the in terior rearview mirror If the LED does not flash faster after at least 60 seconds change the distance and repeat the step Several more attempts at different distances may be necessary Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts Canada if programming with the hand held transmitter was interrupted hold down the interior rearview mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand held transmitter button for 2 sec onds Controls Before operation Before operating a system using the uni v
252. on for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Wheels and tires Mobility Tire size Front 245 40 R 20 99 Y XL RSC Rear 275 35 R 20 102 Y XL RSC Front 245 35 R 21 96 Y XL RSC Rear 275 30 R 21 98 Y XL RSC Emergency wheel T 135 80 R 18 104 M Pressure specifica tions in bar PSI 2 139 2 139 3 0 44 3 1 45 Speed up to a max of 50 mph 80 km h 4 2 160 With high speed tuning feature Tire size Specifications in bar PSI with cold tires 245 50 R 18 100 H M S RSC 245 45 R 19102 VM 2 8 41 S XL RSC Front 245 45 R 19 98 Y RSC Rear 275 40 R 19 101 Y RSC Front 245 40 R 20 99 Y XL RSC Rear 275 35 R 20 102 Y XL RSC Pressure specifica tions in bar PSI hihih 2 6 38 2 8 41 3 1 45 2 6 38 2 6 38 2 81 41 2 81 41 Tire size Front 245 35 R 21 96 Y XL RSC Rear 275 30 R 21 98 Y XL RSC Emergency wheel T 135 80 R 18 104 M Pressure specifica tions in bar PSI 3 2 46 3 2146 Speed up to a max of 50 mph 80 km h 4 2 60 740Ld xDrive 740Li xDrive 7501 xDrive 750Li xDrive Without high speed tuning feature Tire size Pressure specifications in bar PSI Specifications in bar PSI with cold tires 245 50 R 18 100 V M S A S RSC 245 50 R 18 100 H M S RSC 245 45 R 19 102 V M S XL A S RSC 245 45 R 19 102 V M S XL RSC Front 245 45 R 19 98 Y RSC Rear 275 40 R 19 101 Y RSC Front 245 40 R 20 99 Y XL RSC Rear 275 3
253. on the front passenger seat 60 Safety mode In critical situations e g during full brake ap plication the front safety belts tighten auto matically If the situation passes without an accident oc curring the belt tension relaxes If the belt tension does not loosen automati cally stop the vehicle and unbuckle the belt using the red button in the buckle Fasten the belt before continuing on your trip Damage to safety belts Wear and tear after accidents or when dam aged otherwise Have the safety belts including the safety belt tensioners replaced and have the belt anchors checked Check and replace safety belts This should only be done by your service center otherwise this safety feature might not work properly Front head restraints Correctly adjusted head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident Adjusting the head restraint Adjust the head restraints of all occupied seats properly otherwise there is an increased risk of injury in an accident lt Height Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approximately at ear level Distance Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Adjusting Controls Active head restraint In the event of a rear end collision with a cer tain severity the
254. on with the Active Cruise Control this system ensures that the brakes respond even more rapidly when braking in critical sit uations 136 Drive off assistant This system supports driving off on inclines The parking brake is not required 1 Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake 2 Release the foot brake and drive off with out delay After the foot brake is released the vehicle is held in place for approx 2 seconds Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer is used the vehicle may roll back slightly Driving off without delay After releasing the foot brake start driv ing without delay since the drive off assistant will not hold the vehicle in place for more than approx 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin to roll back lt DSC Dynamic Stability Control The concept DSC prevents traction loss in the power wheels when driving off and accelerating DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi tions such as fishtailing or nose diving Within the physical limits DSC helps to keep the vehi cle on a steady course by reducing engine speed and by applying brakes to the individual wheels Note Adjust your driving style to the situation An appropriate driving style is always the responsibility of the driver The laws of physics cannot be repealed not even with DSC Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Driving stability control systems Therefore do not reduce the
255. ood is open lt ee hood is clear otherwise injuries may result 1 Pull the lever fiir i i i oe Let the hood drop from a height of approx 16 2 Press the release handle and open the in 40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully hood The hood must audibly engage on both sides 3 Becareful of protruding parts on the hood 222 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Engine oil Mobility Engine oll Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems General information The engine oil consumption is dependent on the driving style and driving conditions The engine oil consumption can increase in case of for example gt Sporty driving gt Break in the engine gt Idling of the engine gt Usage of non approved engine oil grades Therefore regularly check the engine oil level after refueling The vehicle is equipped with electronic oil measurement The electronic oil measurement has two meas uring principles gt Status display gt Detailed measurement Electronic oil measurement Status d
256. operate the power windows and injure themselves Opening gt Press the button to the resistance point The window opens while the switch is held gt Press the switch beyond the resist ance point Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Opening and closing Controls The window opens automatically Pressing the switch again stopse the motion See also Convenient opening refer to page 37 via remote control Closing Keep the closing path clear Monitor closing and make sure that the closing path of the window is clear otherwise injuries may result lt a gt Pull the switch to the resistance point The window closes while the switch is held a Pull the switch beyond the resistance point The window closes automatically Pulling again stops the motion See also closing by means of Comfort Access refer to page 43 Pinch protection system Danger of jamming even with pinch pro tection Even with the pinch protection system check that the window s closing path is clear other wise the closing action may not stop in certain situations e g if thin objects are present lt No window accessories Do not install any accessories in the win dow s range of movement otherwise the pinch protection system will be impaired If closing force exceeds a specific margin as a window closes closing is interrupted The window reopens slightly Closing without the
257. ort version The short version of the voice dialog plays back short messages in abbreviated form Settings Language Units Speech type 7 2 SS Select setting lt 4 Speech mode Standard Short Adjusting the volume Turn the volume button while giving an in struction until the desired volume is set gt The volume remains constant even if the volume of other audio sources is changed gt The volume is stored for the profile cur rently in use Hints on Emergency Requests Do not use the voice activation system to ini tiate an Emergency Request In stressful situa tions the voice and vocal pitch can change 27 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Ataglance GECUL E Voice activation system This can unnecessarily delay the establish ment of a phone connection Instead use the SOS button refer to page 237 close to the interior mirror Environmental conditions gt Say the commands numbers and letters smoothly and with normal volume empha sis and speed gt Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system gt Keep the doors windows and glass sun roof closed to prevent noise interference gt Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking 28 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Integrated Owner s Manual in the vehicle Ataglance a glance Integrated Owner s Manual in the vehicle Vehicle features an
258. ot need to be changed immediately in the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire Which is why no spare tire is available The tools for changing wheels are available as accessories from your service center Jacking points for the vehicle jack The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo cated at the positions shown Lug bolt lock The adapter of the lug bolt lock is in the on board vehicle tool kit or in a storage compart ment close to the onboard vehicle tool kit Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Replacing components Mobility gt Lug bolt arrow 1 gt Adapter arrow 2 Removing 1 Attach the adapter to the wheel lug 2 Unscrew the lug bolt Remove the adapter after screwing the lug bolt back on Vehicle battery Maintenance The battery is maintenance free The added amount of acid is sufficient for the service life of the battery Further information about the battery can be obtained from your service center Battery replacement Use approved vehicle batteries only Only use vehicle batteries that have been approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer otherwise the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully availa ble After a battery replacement have the battery registered on the vehicle by the service center to ensure that all comfort features are fully available and that any Check Control mes sages of these comfort features are no
259. p to 3 functions of remote controlled sys tems such as garage door drives or lighting systems The universal garage door opener re places up to 3 different hand held transmitters To operate the remote control the buttons on the interior rearview mirror must be program med with the desired functions The hand held transmitter for the particular system is required in order to program the remote control During programming During programming and before activat ing a device using the universal garage door opener ensure that there are no people ani mals or objects in the area of the remote con trolled device otherwise there is a risk of in jury or damage Also follow the safety instructions of the hand held transmitter lt Before selling the vehicle delete the stored functions for the sake of security 172 Compatibility If this symbol is printed on the packag a ing or in the instructions of the system to be controlled the system is gener ally compatible with the universal garage door opener If you have any questions please contact gt Your service center gt www homelink com on the Internet HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation Control elements on the interior rearview mirror gt LED arrow 1 Buttons arrow 2 The hand held transmitter arrow 3 is re quired for programming Programming General information 1 Switch on the ignition 2 Initial setup P
260. peed and style to the traffic conditions The vehicle symbol lights up orange A vehicle has been detected ahead of you The vehicle symbol flashes orange The conditions are not adequate for the system to work The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively resume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal The vehicle symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds You are requested to intervene by braking or make an evasive maneuver Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Driving comfort Controls Displays in the Head up Display Some system information can also be dis played in the Head up Display Distance information f The symbol is displayed when the dis tance from the vehicle traveling ahead is too short Active Cruise Control switched off gt Display in the Head up Display selected refer to page 102 gt Distance too short Speed greater than approx 40 mph 70 km h System limits Speed range The system is best used on well constructed roads The minimum speed that can be set is 20 mph 30 km h The maximum speed that can be set depends on the vehicle The system can also be activated when sta tionary Comply with the legal speed limit in every sit uation when using the system Detection range The detection lidacity of the system and the automatic braking lidacity are limited Two wheeled vehicles for i
261. pinch protection system Keep the closing path clear Monitor closing and make sure that the closing path of the window is clear otherwise injuries may result lt E g danger from the outside or ice might pre vent window from closing properly proceed as follows 1 Pull the reel past the resistance point and hold it there The pinch protection is limited and the window reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain margin 2 Pull the reel past the resistance point again within approx 4 seconds and hold it there The window closes without jam protection Safety switch General information The following functions can be locked simulta neously using the switch gt Opening and closing of the rear windows using the switches in the rear gt Operation of the roller sunblinds using the switches in the rear Adjustment of the power rear seats Adjustment of the power head restraints in the rear Switching on and off A Press button The LED lights up if the safety func tion is switched on Safety switch for rear operation Press the safety switch when transport ing children in the rear otherwise injury may result if the windows are closed without super vision lt 49 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Opening and closing Roller sunblinds Rear door controls General information The safety switch in the driver s door can be used to prevent children e
262. played in the speedometer similarly to the mark for the desired speed Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Driving comfort Controls Brief status display Selected desired speed 95 If appears briefly on the display for Check Control messages it is possible that the sys tem requirements are currently not ready for operations Displays in the Head up Display Some system information can also be dis played in the Head up Display PDC Park Distance Control The concept PDC is a support when parking When you slowly approach an object in the rear or also in the front of the vehicle if the feature is availa ble then the object is reported through gt Signal tones gt Visual display General information Ultrasound sensors in the bumpers measure the distances from objects The maneuvering range depending on the ob stacle and environmental conditions is approx 6 ft 2 m An acoustic warning is first given gt By the front sensors and the two rear cor ner sensors at approx 24 in 60 cm gt By the rear middle sensors at approx 5 ft 1 50 m To ensure full functionality gt Do not cover sensors e g with stickers bicycle racks gt Keep the sensors clean and free of ice gt When using high pressure washers do not spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in 30 cm Hints Personal responsibility Even an active system does
263. pproved by BMW for this purpose Your BMW center is the right contact for genu ine BMW parts and accessories other prod ucts approved by BMW and related qualified advice BMW has tested these products for safety and suitability in relation to BMW vehicles BMW can assume responsibility for them However we cannot assume any responsibility whatsoever for parts and accessories that have not been specifically approved by BMW BMW cannot evaluate whether each individual product from another manufacturer can be used with BMW vehicles without presenting a safety hazard This guarantee does not apply when country specific government approval has been granted Testing of this kind may fail to embrace the entire range of potential oper ating conditions to which components might be exposed on BMW vehicles Such products could conceivably fail to comply with BMW s own stringent quality standards California Proposition 65 Warning California laws require us to state the following warning Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo bile components and parts including compo nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi cle contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Wt Notes chemicals known to the
264. r Diesel The fraction of biodiesel in the fuel must not exceed 5 referred to as B5 Do not use gasoline If you do fill the tank with the wrong fuel e g gasoline do not start the engine as this may damage the engine lt After adding the wrong fuel contact your serv ice center or Roadside Assistance If the fuel pump nozzle does not fit in the filler pipe of your BMW please check to ensure that you are refueling at a diesel fuel pump that is equipped with a diesel fuel pump nozzle In the event the Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel fuel cannot be fully inserted into the fuel filler neck please contact BMW Roadside Assistance for instructions on how to add fuel For additional information regarding Roadside Assistance refer to Owner s Manual for Navi gation Entertainment and Communication Winter diesel To ensure that the diesel engine remains op erational in the winter use winter diesel It is available at gas stations during winter months The fuel filter heating system included as a standard feature prevents disruption of the fuel supply while driving Do not add any diesel additives Do not add additives including gasoline otherwise engine damage may occur lt BMW Advanced Diesel The concept BMW Advanced Diesel reduces nitrogen ox ides in the diesel emissions by injecting diesel exhaust fluid reducing agent into the exhaust system A chemical reaction takes place inside the catalytic converter
265. r approx 8 seconds After this time they are dis played again automatically gt Other Check Control messages are faded automatically after approx 20 seconds They are stored and can be displayed again later Displaying stored Check Control messages On the Control Display 1 Vehicle info 2 Vehicle status 3 A Check Control 4 Select the text message Messages after trip completion Special messages displayed while driving are displayed again after the ignition is switched off Fuel gauge Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to vary f Depending on the equipment version the arrow beside the fuel pump symbol shows which side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on Hints on refueling refer to page 200 Tachometer Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning field In this range the fuel supply is inter rupted to protect the engine Engine oil temperature gt Cold engine the pointer is at the low temperature end Drive at moderate engine and vehicle speeds gt Normal operating tempera ture the pointer is in the middle or in the left half of the temperature display 93 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Displays gt Hot engine the pointer is at the high end of the temperature range A Check Control message is also displayed Coolant temperature If the coolant along with the engine becomes too hot a Check Control message
266. r lever in the desired di rection beyond a resistance point if needed After releasing the selector lever it returns to its center position 83 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Driving The sport program of the transmission is acti vated Activating the M S manual mode 1 Press the selector lever to the left out of selector lever position D 2 Push the selector lever forward or pull it f backward Press unlock button in order to Manual mode becomes active and the gear is gt Engage R changed gt Shift out of P The engaged gear is displayed in the instru ment cluster e g M1 Once maximum engine speed is attained M S manual mode is automatically upshifted as Engaging P n needed Switching to manual mode gt To shift down press the selector lever for ward gt To shift up pull the selector lever rear wards Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine and road speeds for example downshifting is P tton P ress button not possible if the engine speed is too high The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in strument cluster followed by the currently se lected gear Sport program and manual mode Activating the sport program i Ending the sport program manual mode Push the selector lever to the right D is displayed in the instrument cluster Press the selector lever to the left out of selec tor lever position D
267. r the vehicle Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the function of a variety of systems such as ABS or DSC To maintain good handling and vehicle re sponse use only tires with a single tread con figuration from a single manufacturer Following tire damage have the original wheel and tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible Approved wheels and tires You should only use wheels and tires that have been approved by the vehicle manu facturer for your vehicle type otherwise e g despite having the same official size ratings variations can lead to chassis contact and with it the risk of severe accidents The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot eval uate non approved wheels and tires to deter mine if they are suited for use and therefore cannot guarantee the operating safety of the vehicle lt Recommended tire brands For each tire size the manufacturer of your ve hicle recommends certain tire brands These can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall With proper use these tires meet the highest standards for safety and handling New tires Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur ing circumstances when tires are brand new they achieve their full traction potential after a break in time Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles 300 km Retreaded tires The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec ommend the use of retreaded tires Retreaded tires Po
268. rake assistant 136 Brake assistant adaptive 136 Brake discs break in 186 Brake force display 133 Brake lights adaptive 133 Brake lights brake force dis play 133 Brake lights bulb replace ment 233 Brake pads break in 186 Braking hints 188 Breakdown assistance 237 Break in 186 Brightness of Control Dis play 102 Bulb replacement rear 233 Bulb replacement see Lamp and bulb replacement 230 Button RES 147 Button Start Stop 72 Bypassing refer to Jump starting 238 C California Proposition 65 Warning 7 Calling up mirror adjust ment 47 Calling up seat adjust ment 47 Calling up steering wheel ad justment 47 Camera lenses care 245 Camera rearview cam era 156 Camera Side View 158 Camera Top View 160 Can holder refer to Cu pholder 182 Car battery 235 Car care products 243 Care displays 245 Care vehicle 243 Cargo 189 Cargo area storage compart ments 182 Cargo securing 190 Cargo straps securing cargo 190 Car key refer to Remote con trol 34 Carpet care 245 Car wash 242 Catalytic converter refer to Hot exhaust system 186 CBS Condition Based Serv ice 228 CD Multimedia see user s manual for Navigation En tertainment and Communi cation Center armrest 181 Center console 16 Central locking system 40 Central screen refer to Con trol Display 18 Changes technical refer to Safety 7 Changing parts 230 Changing wheels 234 Changing wheels tires
269. ray fluids to start the engine 1 Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an in creased idle speed If the vehicle to be started has a diesel en gine let the engine of the assisting vehicle run for approx 10 minutes Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be started in the usual way If the first starting attempt is not success ful wait a few minutes before making an other attempt in order to allow the dis charged battery to recharge Let both engines run for several minutes Disconnect the jumper cables in the re verse order Check the battery and recharge if needed 239 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 11 15 Mobility Breakdown assistance Tow starting and towing Towing other vehicles Note Hints Tow starting and towing Light towing vehicle For tow starting or towing switch off the The towing vehicle must not be lighter Intelligent Safety systems otherwise malfunc than the vehicle being towed OENE it will tions of the individual braking systems might not be possible to control the vehicle s re lead to accidents lt sponse lt Attaching the tow bar tow rope correctly Transporting your vehicle Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting connecting it to other vehicle parts may Note cause damage lt Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed Therefore contact a service center in the gt Switch on the hazard warning system
270. reases rolling re sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and tire wear Drive away immediately Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary Start driving right away but at moderate engine speeds This is the quickest way of warming the cold engine up to operating temperature Look well ahead when driving Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi cle driving ahead of you Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel consumption Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Saving fuel Drivingtips tips Avoid high engine speeds As arule driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel consumption and reduces wear If necessary observe the gear shift indicator of the vehicle refer to page 96 Use coasting When approaching a red light take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt For going downhill take your foot off the accel erator and let the vehicle roll The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting Switch off the engine during longer stops Switch off the engine during longer stops e g at traffic lights railroad crossings or in traffic congestion Auto Start Stop function The Auto Start Stop function of your vehicle automatically switches off the engine during a stop If the engine is switched off and then restarted rather than leaving the engine running con stantly fuel
271. reen 23 SPORT program Dynamic Driving Control 142 Sport displays torque dis play performance dis play 100 SPORT program driving dy namics 142 Sport program transmis sion 84 Stability control systems 136 Start stop automatic func tion 74 Start Stop button 72 Start function during malfunc tion 35 Starting the engine 73 260 Status control display tires 114 Status information iDrive 22 Status of Owner s Manual 7 Steering Integral Active Steering 140 Steering wheel adjusting 66 Steering wheel heating 67 Steering wheel memory 63 Steptronic transmission 83 Stopping the engine 73 Storage compartments 180 Storage compartments loca tions 180 Storage tires 216 Storing the vehicle 245 Suitable engine oils 225 Summer tires tread 214 Sun visor 174 Supplementary text mes sage 92 Surround View 155 Suspension settings 141 Switch for Dynamic Driving Control 141 Switch on times parked car ventilation 171 Switch refer to Cockpit 14 Symbols 6 Symbols in the status field 22 SYNC program automatic cli mate control 167 T Tachometer 93 Tail and brake lights 233 Tail lights 233 Tail lights bulb replace ment 233 Technical changes refer to Safety 7 Technical data 248 Telephone see user s manual for Navigation Entertain ment and Communication Temperature automatic cli mate control 166 Temperature display for ex ternal temperature 94 Temperature engine
272. requirement For proper operation gt Keep the photocells clean gt Do not cover the area between the inside rearview mirror and the windshield The steering wheel can be adjusted in four di rections 66 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Adjusting Controls Storing the position Seat mirror and steering wheel memory refer to page 63 Assistance getting in and out The steering wheel temporarily moves into the highest position to make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle Steering wheel heating EJ Press button gt On the LED lights up gt Off the LED goes out If the trip is resumed within approx 15 min steering wheel heating is automatically acti vated again 67 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Transporting children safely Transporting children safely Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to The right place for children Note Children in the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle otherwise they could endanger them selves and other persons e g by opening the doors lt Children should always be in the rear Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the back seat Transporting children in the rear
273. ress and hold the left and right button on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the LED on the interior rearview mirror flashes This Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Interior equipment Controls erases all programming of the buttons on the interior rearview mirror 3 Hold the hand held transmitter for the sys tem to be controlled approx 1 to 3 in 2 5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of the interior rearview mirror The required distance de pends on the manual transmitter 4 Simultaneously press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand held transmitter and the button to be program med on the interior rearview mirror The LED on the interior rearview mirror will be gin flashing slowly 5 Release both buttons as soon as the LED flashes more rapidly The LED flashing faster indicates that the button on the inte rior rearview mirror has been programmed If the LED does not flash faster after at least 60 seconds change the distance be tween the interior rearview mirror and the hand held transmitter and repeat the step Several more attempts at different distan ces may be necessary Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts Canada if programming with the hand held transmitter was interrupted hold down the interior rearview mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand held transmitter button for 2 sec onds 6 To program other f
274. rol refer to page Current fuel consumption refer to page Navigation display see User s manual for Navigation Entertainment and Communi cation The instrument display is a variable display In the event of a program change the display rendition adapts to the respective program through the Driving Dynamics Control The change of appearance can be deactivated on the Control Display Fuel gauge Indicator warning lights Speedometer mh ON Variable displays Range refer to page Status Driving Dynamics Control refer to page Service requirements refer to page Speed limit detection refer to page Time refer to page Some of the displays in the instrument display may differ from the way they are shown in this Owner s Manual 5 Tachometer Selection lists ECO PRO displays 6 Engine oil temperature 87 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 7 Computer 8 Reset miles You can set whether the instrument display o On the Control Display automatically changes to the ECO PRO or SPORT in the display when you switch driving modes Instrument cluster Settings Settings Magnifier function Instrument cluster ECO PRO Info Or Driving mode view You can program whether the current speed is to appear enlarged in the speedometer ECO PRO khos 4 1 Speedometer 2 Variable displays ECO PRO Tips Deceler ation assistant instructions Driver assist system displays 88 Online
275. rol Display 1 Settings 2 Head Up Display 3 Displayed information 4 Select the desired displays in the Head up Display Settings are stored for the profile currently in use Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Displays Controls Setting the brightness The brightness is automatically adjusted to the ambient brightness The basic setting can be adjusted manually On the Control Display Settings Head Up Display Brightness hy Turn the controller When the low beams are activated the bright ness of the Head up Display can be addition ally influenced using the instrument lighting Settings are stored for the profile currently in use Adjusting the height On the Control Display Settings Head Up Display Height Turn the controller p e Settings are stored for the profile currently in use Setting the rotation On the Control Display Settings Head Up Display Rotation gt a a Turn the controller Settings are stored for the profile currently in use Special windshield The windshield is part of the system The shape of the windshield makes it possible to display a precise image A film in the windshield prevents double im ages from being displayed Therefore have the special windshield re placed by a service center only 103 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Lights Lights Vehicle
276. ront windshield are dirty or covered gt Upto 10 seconds after the start of the en gine via the Start Stop knob gt During calibration of the camera immedi ately after vehicle shipment gt If there is constant blinding effects be cause of oncoming light e g from the sun low in the sky gt When it is dark outside Night Vision with Pedestrian and Animal Detection The concept Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec tion is a night vision system An infrared camera scans the area in front of the vehicle and issues a warning if it detects pedestrians and animals on the street Warm objects that are similar in shape to human be ings or animals are detected by the system If necessary the heat image can be displayed on the Control Display Heat image The image shows the heat radiated by objects in the field of view of the camera Warm objects have a light appearance and cold objects a dark appearance The ability to detect an object depends on the temperature difference between the object and the background and on the level of heat radiation emitted by the object Objects that are similar in temperature to the environment or that radiate very little heat are difficult to de tect For safety reasons when driving at speeds above approx 3 mph 5 km h and in low ambi ent light the image is only displayed when the low beams are activated A still image is displayed at regular interva
277. rse of the smallest pos sible turning radius on a level road gt Only one turning radius line is displayed af ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer tain angle Obstacle marking Obstacle markings can be faded into the image of the rearview camera Their colored margins match the markings of the PDC This simplifies estimation of the dis tance to the object shown Parking using pathway and turning radius lines 1 Position the vehicle so that the turning ra dius lines lead to within the limits of the parking space 2 Turn the steering wheel to the point where the pathway line covers the corresponding turning radius line Display settings Brightness With the rearview camera switched on 1 Select the symbol 2 Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller Contrast With the rearview camera switched on 1 Select the symbol 2 Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller 157 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Driving comfort System limits Detection of objects Very low obstacles as well as high protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected by the system Assistance functions also take into account data of the PDC Follow instructions in the PDC chapter refer to page 153 The objects displayed on the Control Display under certain circumstances are closer
278. rt Clean the camera lenses refer to page 245 Switching on off Switching on automatically With the engine running engage lever in posi tion PR The Top View and PDC images are displayed if the system is switched on via iDrive Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded Switch the system back on if needed Switching on off manually Press button PY gt On the LED lights up gt Off the LED goes out Top View is displayed Display Visual warning The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display 160 When the distance to an object is small a red bar is shown in front of the vehicle as it is in the PDC display The display appears as soon as Top View is activated When the image of the rearview camera is dis played it is possible to reel to top view cy Rear view camera Brightness With Top View switched on 1 Select the symbol 2 Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller Contrast With Top View switched on 1 Select the symbol 2 Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller Displaying the turning radius and pathway lines gt The static red turning radius line shows the space needed to the side of the vehicle when the steering wheel is turned all the way gt
279. rther optimize traction and driving dynamics The xDrive all wheel drive system variably dis tributes the drive forces to the front and rear axles as demanded by the driving situation and road surface HDC Hill Descent Control The concept HDC is a downhill driving assistant that auto matically controls vehicle speed on steep downhill gradients Without applying the 138 brakes the vehicle moves at slightly more than walking speed Hill Descent Control can be activated at speeds below approx 22 mph 35 km h When driving downhill the vehicle reduces its speed to approx walking speed and then keeps its speed constant As long as there is active braking the system is on standby The system does not brake the vehicle during this time Only use HDC in low gears or in selector lever position D or R Increasing or decreasing vehicle speed Specify desired speed in the range from ap prox 4 mph 6 km h to approx 15 mph 25 km h using the rocker switch of the cruise control on the steering wheel Vehicle speed can be changed by lightly accelerating gt Press the rocker switch up to the point of resistance the speed increases gradually gt Press up the rocker switch past the point of resistance the speed increases while the rocker switch is pressed gt Press the rocker switch down to the point of resistance the speed decreases gradu ally gt Press the rocker switch down past the point of resistance wh
280. ry or region In such case please contact Customer Relations for further information Maintenance Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety operational reliability and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Specifications for required maintenance meas ures gt BMW Maintenance system gt Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models gt Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models If the vehicle is not maintained according to these specifications this could result in seri ous damage to the vehicle Such damage is not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty Data memory Many electronic components on your vehicle are equipped with data memories that tempo rarily or permanently store technical informa tion about the condition of the vehicle events and faults This technical information generally records the state of a component a module a system or the environment gt Operating mode of system components fill levels for instance gt Status messages for the vehicle and from its individual components e g wheel rota tion speed vehicle speed deceleration transverse acceleration gt Malfunctions and faults in important sys tem components e g lights and brakes gt Responses by the vehicle to special situa tions such as airbag deployment or engag ing the stability control system gt Ambient conditions such as temperature This data is purely techn
281. s An alarm has been triggered Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is towed Interior motion sensor The windows and glass sunroof must be closed for the system to function properly Avoiding unintentional alarms The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen sor can be switched off together such as in the following situations gt In automatic car washes gt In duplex garages gt During transport on trains carrying vehi cles at sea or on a trailer gt With animals in the vehicle Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor Press the remote control button again within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is locked 48 The indicator lamp lights up for approx 2 sec onds and then continues to flash The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen sor are turned off until the vehicle is locked again Switching off the alarm gt Unlock vehicle with the remote control or switch on the ignition if needed through emergency detection of remote control re fer to page 35 gt With Comfort Access if you are carrying the remote control on your person grasp the driver side or front passenger side door handle completely Power windows Hint Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children e g can not
282. s advantageous gt In car washes gt In narrow streets gt For folding mirrors back out that were folded away manually Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto matically at a speed of approx 25 mph 40 km h Fold in the mirror in a car wash Before washing the car in an automatic car wash fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the button otherwise the mirrors could be damaged depending on the width of the vehicle lt Automatic heating Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated whenever the engine is running Automatic dimming feature Both exterior mirrors are automatically dim med Photocells are used to control the Interior rearview mirror refer to page 66 65 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Adjusting Interior rearview mirror manually Illuminated vanity mirror in dimmable the rear Turn knob Folding down Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by i Press button the interior mirror The vanity mirror folds down Interior rearview mirror automatic The angle can be adjusted by hand dimming feature Folding up The concept Press the mirror up Steering wheel Note Do not adjust while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving otherwise an unexpected movement could result in an accident Photocells are used for control gt Inthe mirror glass Adjusting gt On the back of the mirror Functional
283. s displayed on the Control Display Guidelines at the bottom of the image show the position of the front of the vehicle Brightness With the Side View switched on 1 Brightness 2 Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller Contrast With the Side View switched on 1 Contrast 2 Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller System limits The cameras lidture a maximum range of 330 ft 100 m Top View The concept Top View provides assistance in parking and maneuvering The area around the doors and the road area around the vehicle are shown on the Control Display for this purpose General information The image is lidtured by two cameras integrated in the exterior mirrors and by the rearview camera The range is at least 7 ft 2 m to the side and rear In this way obstacles up to the height of the exterior mirrors are detected early Hints Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve hicle with your own eyes Otherwise an acci dent could result from road users or objects that are not lidtured by the camera Overview Button in the vehicle Py Top View 159 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Driving comfort The lenses of the Top View camera are located at the bottom in the mirror housings The im age quality may be impaired by di
284. s in which the opened trunk lid should not to be closed with no touch acti vation ensure that the remote control is lo cated beyond the range of the sensor at least 5 ft 1 50 m from the rear of the car Otherwise the trunk lid may be closed inadver tently for example by an unintentional or mis interpreted movement of the foot lt Keep the closing path clear Make sure that the closing path of the trunk lid is clear otherwise injuries may re sult Do not place the remote control in the cargo area Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area otherwise the re 45 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Opening and closing mote control is locked inside the vehicle when the trunk lid is closed lt Malfunction Remote control detection by the vehicle can among others be malfunctioning under the fol lowing circumstances gt The battery of the remote control is dis charged Replace the battery refer to page 35 gt Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmit power gt Shielding of the remote control due to metal objects gt Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity Do not transport the remote control together with metal objects or electronic devices In the case of a malfunction unlock and lock the vehicle using the butto
285. s or when turning an additional corner illuminating lamp is switched on that lights up the inside of the curve when the vehicle is moving below a certain speed Activating Position of switch 2 with the ignition switched on To avoid blinding oncoming traffic the Adap tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv er s side when the vehicle is at a standstill The turning lights are automatically switched on depending on the steering angle or the use of turn signals When driving in reverse the turning lights may be automatically switched on regardless of the steering angle Self leveling headlights The self leveling headlights compensate for acceleration and braking operations in order not to blind the oncoming traffic and to achieve optimum illumination of the roadway Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed Adaptive Light Control is malfunctioning or has failed Have the system checked as soon as possible High beam Assistant The concept When the low beams are activated this system automatically switches the high beams on and off or suppresses the light in the areas that blind oncoming traffic The procedure is con trolled by a camera on the front of the interior rearview mirror The assistant ensures that the high beams are activated whenever the traffic situation allows The driver can intervene at 106 any time and switch the high beams non and off as usual Note Personal responsib
286. s possible to the back of the head 61 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Adjusting Folding forward the center head restraint Before using the center seat fold the center head restraint forward Press button arrow 1 and fold the head re straint forward Adjusting the height manual head restraints a pa The height of the outer head restraints can be adjusted gt To raise push gt To lower press button arrow 1 and push headrest down Adjusting the height electrical head restraints gt The head restraints on the left and right rear passenger seats extend automatically whenever a passenger in the rear seat fas tens his or her safety belt 62 gt In addition the height of the head restraint can be adjusted electrically Extending the head restraint To prevent possible personal injury and property damage always ensure that the area above the head restraints is clear and unob structed before extending them upward The height adjustment of the head restraint is deactivated when the safety switch for the rear windows refer to page 49 has been pressed Adjusting the side extensions i J P f L f f if p j u r i A _ Fold the side extensions on the head restraint forward for increased lateral support in the resting position Removing manual head restraints Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in
287. s sidewall Do not continue driving without run flat tires Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run flat tires continued driving may result in serious accidents lt When a flat tire is indicated DSC Dynamic Sta bility Control is switched on if needed System limits Sudden tire damage Sudden serious tire damage caused by external circumstances cannot be recognized in advance lt A natural even tire inflation pressure loss in all four tires will not be recognized Therefore check the tire inflation pressure regularly The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations gt When the system has not been initialized When driving on a snowy or slippery road surface gt Sporty driving style spinning traction wheels high lateral acceleration drifting gt When driving with snow chains Actions in the event of a flat tire Normal tires 1 Identify the damaged tire Do this by checking the air pressure in all four tires The tire pressure gage of the Mobility Sys tem refer to page 216 can possibly be used for this purpose If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized In this case initialize the system If an identification is not possible please contact the service center 2 Fix the flat tire where applicable using the Mobility System refer to page 216 Run flat tires Maxi
288. s to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment Identifies display texts in vehicle used to select individual functions Verbal instructions to use with the voice activation system Identifies the answers generated by the voice activation system Symbols on vehicle components Ti Indicates that you should consult the relevant section of this Owner s Manual for information on a particular part or assembly Vehicle features and options This Owner s Manual describes all models and all standard country specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series Therefore in this Owner s Manual we also de scribe and illustrate features that are not avail able in your vehicle e g because of the se lected optional features or the country specific version This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems For any options and equipment not described in this Owner s Handbook refer to the Supple mentary Owner s Handbooks Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Notes Po On right hand drive vehicles some controls are arranged differently from what is shown in the illustrations Status of the Owner s Manual Basic information The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a policy of constant development that is con ceived to ensure tha
289. s to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems 1 Unlocking 2 Locking Remote control key 3 Opening the trunk lid General information 4 Press briefly headlight courtesy delay fea ture The vehicle is supplied with two remote con trols with integrated key Press and hold Panic mode Every remote control holds a replaceable bat tery Integrated key You may set the key functions depending on the optional features and country specific ver sion For Settings refer to page 46 The vehicle stores personal settings for every remote control Personal Profile refer to page 35 The remote controls hold information on re quired maintenance Service data in the re mote control refer to page 228 Press button arrow 1 and remove the key ar row 2 The integrated key fits the following locks gt Driver s door gt Trunk lid gt Storage compartment in the front center armrest The storage compartment contains a switch for separately securing the trunk lid refer to page 43 34 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Opening and closing Controls Replacing the battery gt Interference of radio transmission by charger while charging items such as mo bile devices in the vehicle A Check Control message is displayed if an at tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start the engine
290. se lected time frame Trip interruptions are represented below the bar on the time axis hit Consumption history Adjusting fuel consumption history time frame lai Select the symbol Resetting fuel consumption history 1 Open Options 2 Reset consumption history Displaying EfficientDynamics info The current efficiency can be displayed el EfficientDynamics info The following systems are displayed gt Auto Start Stop function gt Energy recovery gt Climate control output gt Coasting Display ECO PRO tips and forward view i ECO PRO Tips The driving instruction for decelerating in ad vance and an additional symbol show the up coming route section Settings are stored for the profile currently in use Coasting The concept The system helps to conserve fuel To do this under certain conditions the engine is automatically decoupled from the transmis 196 sion when selector lever position D is set The vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling to reduce fuel consumption Selector lever position D remains engaged This driving condition is referred to as coast Ing As soon as you step on the brake or accelera tor pedal the engine is automatically coupled again Hints Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO re fer to page 193 driving mode Coasting is automatically activated when ECO PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics Control The function is avai
291. se fuel filler flap 200 Emergency release parking brake 78 Emergency Request 237 Emergency start function en gine start 35 Emergency unlocking trans mission lock 85 Emergency unlocking trunk lid 43 Energy Control 95 Energy recovery 95 Engine automatic Start Stop function 74 Engine automatic switch off 74 Engine compartment 221 Engine compartment work Ing in 221 Engine coolant 226 Engine idling when driving coasting 196 Engine oil 223 Engine oil adding 224 Engine oil additives 225 Engine oil change 225 Engine oil filler neck 224 Engine oil temperature 93 Engine oil types alterna tive 225 Engine oil types ap proved 225 Engine start during malfunc tion 35 Engine start jump start ing 238 Engine start refer to Starting the engine 73 Engine stop 73 Engine temperature 93 Entering exiting vehicle as sistance steering wheel 67 Entering a car wash 242 Equipment interior 172 Error displays see Check Control 89 ESP Electronic Stability Pro gram refer to DSC 136 Exchanging wheels tires 214 Exhaust system 186 Exterior mirror automatic dimming feature 65 Exterior mirrors 64 External start 238 External temperature dis play 94 External temperature warn ing 94 Eyes for securing cargo 190 IF Failure message see Check Control 89 False alarm refer to Uninten tional alarm 48 Fan refer to Air flow 166 Filler neck for engine oil 224 Fine wood care 24
292. se the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving and create the risk of an accident Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly attached to floor Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas tened again after they were removed for clean ing g lt Driving in wet conditions When roads are wet salted or in heavy rain press brake pedal ever so gently every few miles Ensure that this action does not endanger other traffic The heat generated in this process helps dry the brake discs and pads In this way braking efficiency will be available when you need tt 188 Things to remember when driving Hills Avoid stressing the brakes Avoid placing excessive stress on the brake system Light but consistent brake pres sure can lead to high temperatures brakes wearing out and possibly even brake failure Do not drive in neutral Do not drive in neutral or with the engine stopped as doing so disables engine braking In addition steering and brake assist are un available with the engine stopped Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear that requires least braking efforts Other wise the brakes may overheat and reduce brake efficiency You can increase the engine s braking effect by shifting down going all the way to first gear if needed Brake disc corrosion Brake
293. see user s manual Parking assistant 161 for Navigation Entertainment and Commu Side View 158 nication 6 Automatic climate control 165 HDC Hill D t Control 1 7 Controller with buttons 18 ill Descent Control 138 vid Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Cockpit PAE Rel Elite 10 sport Dynamic Driving Control 141 11 Transmission selector lever A Vv COMFORT DSC Dynamic Stability Con GF trol 141 All around the roofliner q 1 N Intelligent Emergency Re 4 Reading lights 108 SOS quest 237 N Glass sunroof powered 50 5 Interior lights 107 3 Indicator lamp front seat pas PASS AIR BAG senger airbag 111 2 3 17 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Ataglance GEIG iDrive iDrive Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems The concept The iDrive combines the functions of many switches Thus these functions can be oper ated from a central location Using the iDrive during a trip To avoid becoming distracted and pos ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle s occupants
294. some braking intervention if there is risk of a collision At low speeds vehicles may thus come to acomplete stop The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti vated The braking intervention can be interrupted by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac tively moving the steering wheel Object detection can be restricted Limitations of the detection range and functional restric tions are to be considered System limits Detection range The system s detection potential is limited Thus a warning might not be issued or be is sued late E g the following situations may not be de tected gt Slow moving vehicles when you approach them at high speed gt Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you or sharply decelerating vehicles gt Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance Two wheeled vehicles ahead of you Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations gt In heavy fog rain sprayed water or snow fall gt In tight curves If the driving stability control systems are limited or deactivated e g DSC OFF gt If depending on the vehicle equipment version the field of view of the camera in the mirror or the radar sensor is dirty or ob scured gt Upto 10 seconds after the start of the en gine via the Start Stop knob gt During calibration of the c
295. ss of consciousness and death The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas lt Unattended vehicle Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running doing so poses a risk of danger Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run ning set the parking brake and place the trans mission in selector lever position P or N to pre vent the vehicle from moving lt Repeated starting in quick succession Avoid trying to start the vehicle repeat edly and in quick succession Otherwise the fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned posing a risk of overheating and damage to the catalytic converter lt Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary Start driving at moderate engine speeds Diesel engine If the engine is cold and temperatures are be low approx 32 F 0 C the start process may be delayed somewhat due to automatic pre heating A Check Control message is displayed Starting the engine Press on the brake pedal and press the Start Stop button The engine is cranked until it Starts Engine stop Hints Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children e g can not start the engine Apply parking brake and further secure the vehicle if needed Set the parking brake firmly when parking oth erwise the vehicle could roll On steep upward and dow
296. ssibly substantial variations in the de sign and age of the tire casing structures can limit service life and have a negative impact on road safety lt Winter tires Winter tires are recommended for operating on winter roads Although so called all season M S tires pro vide better winter traction than summer tires they do not provide the same level of perform ance as winter tires Maximum speed of winter tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires then a respective symbol is displayed in your field of vision You can obtain this sign from the tire specialist or from your service center Maximum speed for winter tires Do not exceed the maximum speed for the respective winter tires otherwise tire dam age and accidents can occur Run flat tires If you are already using run flat tires for your own Safety you should replace them only with the same kind No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire Your service center will be glad to advise you 215 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Mobility Wheels and tires Rotating wheels between axles Different wear patterns can occur on the front and rear axles depending on individual driving conditions The tires can be rotated between the axles to achieve even wear Your service center will be glad to advise you After rotating check the tire pressure and correct if needed Rotat
297. stems found in the approval documents on informa tion signs on the vehicle or can be obtained from the service center The information in the vehicle documents al ways has priority roof racks or spoiler The heights can deviate for example due to the selected special equip ment tires load and chassis version inches mm 84 3 2 142 inches mm 74 9 1 902 inches mm 57 9 1 471 inches mm 58 3 1 481 inches mm 200 0 5 080 inches mm 205 515 220 inches mm 120 9 3 070 inches mm 126 4 3 210 ft m 40 12 2 41 12 5 ft m 41 7 12 7 42 7 13 0 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Technical data Reference Weights Approved gross vehicle weight los kg Load los kg Approved front axle load lbs kg Approved rear axle load los kg Approved roof load capacity los kg Cargo area capacity cu ft l 5 545 2 515 1 035 469 2 600 1 179 3 120 1 415 220 100 17 7 500 5 635 2 556 970 440 2 625 1 191 3 140 1 424 220 100 17 7 500 Approved gross vehicle weight los kg Load los kg Approved front axle load lbs kg Approved rear axle load lbs kg Approved roof load capacity lbs kg Cargo area capacity cu ft l 5 785 2 624 970 440 2 755 1 250 3 155 1 431 220 100 17 7 500 Approved gross vehicle weight lbs kg Load los kg Approved front axle load lbs kg Approved rear axle load lbs kg Approved roof load capacity lbs kg Cargo area capacity cu ft l 5 735 2 601 1 035 469 2 755 1 250 3 140 1 424 220 100 17 7 500
298. stems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Important features in the engine compartment Vehicle identification number Jump starting negative battery terminal Washer fluid reservoir mh WON Jump starting positive battery terminal Hood Opening the hood Working in the engine compartment Never attempt to perform any service or repair operations on your vehicle without the necessary professional technical training 5 Oil filler neck 760i Li filler neck is located under a flap 6 Coolant reservoir except 750i Li and 760i Li If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide lines have any work on the vehicle performed only by a service center If work is not carried out properly there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards lt 221 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Mobility Engine compartment Never reach into the engine compart Closing the hood ment Hood open when driving Never reach into spaces or gaps in the engine compartment otherwise there is a risk of in jury e g from rotating or hot parts If you see any signs that the hood is not completely closed while driving pull over im mediately and close it securely lt Danger of injury when the hood is open Danger of jamming There is a danger of injury from protrud Mak that the closi ath of the ing parts when the h
299. sure lt No fluids in the cargo area Make sure that fluids do not leak into the cargo area otherwise the vehicle may be dam aged lt Heavy and hard objects Do not stow any heavy and hard objects in the car s interior without securing them oth erwise they may present a danger to occu pants e g during braking and evasive maneu vers lt Determining the load limit 1 Locate the following statement on your ve hicle s placard gt The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or YYY Ibs Otherwise damage to the 2 Loading MRP iitema es vehicle and unstable driving situations may result Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY pounds The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load ca pacity For example if the YYY amount equals 1 000 Ibs and there will be four 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 400 Ibs 1 000 Ibs minus 600 Ibs 400 Ibs Determine the combined weight of lug gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi cle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 189 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Driving tips jem Loading ILA Max Load IA
300. switch off heat image A 128 Camera The camera is automatically heated when the external temperatures are low The camera lens is automatically cleaned to gether with the headlights Switching on off Switching on automatically When it is dark outside the system is automat ically active after every driving off Switch off The system is only switched off until the next time the engine is started with the Start Stop button Press button VN The LED goes out Switching on heat image additionally The heat image from the Night Vision camera can also be displayed on the Control Display This function has no effect on object detec tion ma Press button Ai The image from the camera is displayed on the Control Display Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Safety Controls Adjustments via the iDrive With heat image switched on 1 Press the controller 2 Select brightness or contrast gt Select the symbol gt Select the symbol 3 Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected 4 Press the controller Display Warning of people or animals in danger If a collision with a person or an animal de tected in this way is imminent a warning sym bol appears on the instrument cluster and in the Head up Display Although both the shape and the heat radiation are analyzed false warnings cannot be ruled out Warning area in front of the vehicle c
301. t Symbol orange system is acti vated gt Symbol green at least one lane marking was detected and warn ings can be issued Issued warning If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has been detected the steering wheel begins vi brating If the turn signal is set before changing the lane a warning is not issued End of warning The warning ends gt Automatically after approx 3 seconds gt When returning to your own lane gt When braking hard gt When using the turn signal System limits The system may not be fully functional in the following situations gt In heavy fog rain or snowfall gt Inthe event of missing worn poorly visi ble merging diverging or multiple lane markings such as in construction areas gt When lane markings are covered in snow ice dirt or water In tight curves or on narrow lanes gt When the lane markings are covered by objects gt When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you gt When driving toward bright lights When the windshield in front of the interior rearview mirror is fogged over dirty or cov ered with stickers etc gt During calibration of the camera immedi ately after vehicle shipment 131 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Safety Active Blind Spot Detection The concept Two radar sensors below the rear bumper monitor the area behind and next to the vehicle at sp
302. t our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety stan dards In rare cases therefore the features de scribed in this Owner s Manual may differ from those in your vehicle Updates made after the editorial deadline Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the Owner s Manuals are found in the ap pendix of the printed Quick Reference for the vehicle For your own safety Warranty Your vehicle is technically configured for the operating conditions and registration require ments applying in the country of first delivery homologation If your vehicle is to be operated in a different country it might be necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing oper ating conditions and permit requirements If your vehicle does not comply with the homolo gation requirements in a certain country you cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there Further information can be obtained from your Service Centre Maintenance and repairs Advanced technology e g the use of modern materials and high performance electronics requires suitable maintenance and repair work Therefore have this work performed only by a BMW center or a workshop that works accord ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri ately trained personnel If work is not carried out properly there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards Parts and accessories BMW recommends using parts and accesso ries a
303. t the sealant container on the com 7 With the ignition turned on or the engine pressor housing in an upright position running reel on the compressor e M 5 Screw the filling hose of the sealant con Switch off the compressor after 10 mi tainer onto the tire valve of the defective nutes wheel Do not allow the compressor to run longer than 10 minutes otherwise the device will overheat A and may be damaged Let the compressor run for approx 3 to 8 mi nutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a d ee tire inflation pressure of approx 2 5 bar LS amp white the tire is being filled with sealant the Mg tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx 5 bar Do not reel off the compressor at this point 6 With the compressor switched off insert If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is not the plug into the power socket inside the reached vehicle Switch off the compressor 2 Unscrew the filling hose from the wheel 7 3 Drive 33 ft 10 m forward and back to dis Ka tribute the sealant in the tire _ A 4 Inflate the tire again using the compressor gt If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be ea reached contact your service center Stowing the Mobility System 1 Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con tainer from the wheel 2 Unscrew the connection hose of the com pressor from the sealant container 3 Connect the filling hose of the sealant con tainer previously connected to the
304. tachometer approximately indicates idle Settings are stored for the profile currently in use speed The coasting point indicator is illuminated at the zero point during coasting Display in the instrument display BA The mark in the efficiency dis play is backlit in blue and is lo pis cated at the zero point GAN The coasting point indicator is il luminated at the zero point dur ing coasting Indications on the Control Display The Coasting driving condition is displayed in EfficientDynamics Info while this driving mode is active EfficientDynamics Color code blue arrow 1 and symbol arrow 2 driving condition Coasting Displaying EfficientDynamics info 1 Vehicle info 197 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Witeleiiiavam Refueling Refueling Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Hints Observe the fuel recommendation refer to page 202 prior to refueling Refuel promptly Refuel no later than at a range of 30 miles 50 km or engine operation might fail and
305. tank lid for the reducing agent is located in the rear bumper under a cover Adding the reducing agent Add the reducing agent when the ignition is switched on 6 Pull back the bottle see arrow and un screw it 1 Open trunk lid refer to page 40 2 Push on the edge of the cover to push it out 3 Turn the tank lid counterclockwise and re move AN 7 Replace the tank lid and turn it clockwise Close the cover 9 Close the trunk lid 205 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Mobility Fuel After adding Diesel exhaust fluid Note Incorrect fluids After filling with incorrect fluids such as antifreeze for washer fluid do not start the en gine otherwise there is risk of fire lt Contact your service center Disposing of bottles Ky You take your empty Diesel exhaust fluid bottles to your service center for disposal Do not dispose of empty bottles with house hold waste unless this is permitted by local regulations Reserve indication The Reserve display will still ap pear along with the remaining range after refilling Engine can be started After several minutes of driving the Reserve indication goes out Diesel exhaust fluid on minimum After filling the indication is still displayed amp c Only after the display goes out can the engine be started 1 Switch on the ignition Display goes out after approx 1 minute 2 Engi
306. te control key 34 Remote control malfunc tion 38 Remote control univer sal 172 Replacement fuse 236 Replacing parts 230 Replacing wheels tires 214 Reporting safety defects 9 RES button 147 RES button see Active Cruise Control ACC 144 RES button see Cruise con trol 151 Reserve warning refer to Range 94 Reset Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 115 Residual heat automatic cli mate control 168 Retaining straps Securing cargo 190 Retreaded tires 215 Reversing lamp bulb replace ment 233 Roadside parking lights 105 Roller sunblinds 50 Roll stabilization refer to Adaptive Drive 139 Roll stabilization refer to Dy namic Drive 139 RON recommended fuel grade 202 Roofliner 17 Roof load capacity 249 Roof mounted luggage rack 190 Rope for tow starting towing 240 RSC Run Flat System Com ponent refer to Run flat tires 216 Rubber components care 244 Run flat tires 216 S Safe braking 188 Safety 7 Safety belt reminder for driv er s seat and front passen ger seat 60 Safety belts 59 Safety belts care 244 Safety Package refer to Ac tive Protection 133 Safety switch windows 49 Safety systems airbags 109 Saving fuel 192 Screen refer to Control Dis play 18 Screwdriver see Onboard ve hicle tool kit 230 Screw thread refer to Screw thread for tow fitting screw thread for tow fitting 241 Sealant 216 Seat belts refer to Safety belts 59 Seat heating front 56 Seat h
307. ter nating code 173 Hazard warning flashers 237 HDC Hill Descent Con trol 138 Head airbags 109 Headlight control auto matic 105 Headlight courtesy delay fea ture 105 Headlight courtesy delay fea ture via remote control 38 Headlight flasher 80 Headlight glass 231 Headlights care 243 Headlight washer system 80 Head restraints 53 Head restraints front 60 Head restraints rear 61 Head up Display 102 Head up Display care 245 Heavy cargo stowing 190 Height vehicle 248 High beam Assistant 106 High beams 80 256 High beams low beams refer to High beam Assistant 106 Hill Descent Control HDC 138 Hills 188 Hill start assistant refer to Drive off assistant 136 Hints 6 Holder for beverages 182 Homepage 6 Hood 221 Horn 14 Hotel function trunk lid 43 Hot exhaust system 186 HUD Head up Display 102 Hydroplaning 187 Ice warning see External temperature warning 94 Icy roads see External tem perature warning 94 Identification marks tires 212 Identification number see ve hicle identification num ber 9 iDrive 18 Ignition key refer to Remote control 34 Ignition off 72 Ignition on 72 Indication of a flat tire 113 115 Indicator and alarm lamps see Check Control 89 Indicator lamp see Check Control 89 Individual air distribution 166 Individual settings refer to Personal Profile 35 Inflation pressure tires 207 Inflation pressure warning FTM tires 112 Info display refer t
308. termining when to turn the lights on in response to ambient lighting conditions E g the sensors are unable to detect fog or hazy weather To avoid safety risks under these conditions you should always switch on the lights manually lt Daytime running lights With the ignition switched on the daytime run ning lights light up in position 0 DQ or 40 After the ignition is switched off the park ing lights light up in position 30 Q Activating deactivating In some countries daytime running lights are mandatory so it may not be possible to deacti vate the daytime running lights On the Control Display 1 Settings 2 Lighting 3 Daytime running lamps Settings are stored for the profile currently in use Roadside parking lights l The vehicle can be illuminated on one side Switching on With the ignition switched off press the lever either up or down past the resistance point for approx 2 seconds Switch off Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction Adaptive Light Control The concept Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlight control system that enables dynamic illumina tion of the road surface Depending on the steering angle and other pa rameters the light from the headlight follows the course of the road 105 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Lights In tight curves e g on mountainous road
309. th Automatic Hold 76 Particulate filter 187 Parts and accessories 7 Passenger side mirror tilting downward 65 Pathway lines rearview cam era 156 PDC Park Distance Con trol 153 Pedestrian detection see Night Vision 127 Pedestrian warning with city braking function 124 Personal Profile 35 Personal Profile exporting profiles 36 Pinch protection system glass sunroof 51 Pinch protection system win dows 49 Plastic care 244 Power failure 235 Power sunroof glass 50 Power windows 48 Pressure tire air pres sure 207 Pressure warning FTM tires 112 Profile refer to Personal Pro file 35 Programmable memory but tons iDrive 23 Protective function glass sunroof 51 Protective function win dows 49 Push and turn switch refer to Controller 18 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Everything from A to Z Reference R Radiator fluid 226 Radio operated key refer to Remote control 34 Radio ready state 72 Radio see user s manual for Navigation Entertainment and Communication Rain sensor 81 Rear automatic climate con trol 169 Rear axle steering 140 Rear cooler 177 Rear lights 233 Rear seats 56 Rear seats basic position 58 Rear sockets 176 Rear vanity mirror 66 Rearview camera 155 Rearview mirror 64 Rear window defroster 167 Recirculated air mode 167 Recommended fuel grade 202 Recommended tire brands 215 Refueling 200 Remaining range 94 Remo
310. th a TPMS malfunction indi cator to indicate when the system is not oper ating properly The TPMS malfunction indica tor is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunc tion the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illumi nated This sequence will continue upon sub sequent vehicle start ups as long as the mal function exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replace ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop erly Always check the TPMS malfunction tell tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly Intelligent Safety The concept Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the driver assistance system Depending on how the vehicle is equipped In telligent Safety consists of one or more sys 117 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Safety tems that can help prevent a imminent colli sion These systems are active automatically every time the engine is started using the Start Stop button gt Front end collision warning refer to page 119 gt Pedestrian w
311. the vehicle is stationary cannot be used via the voice activation system gt The system uses a special microphone on the driver s side gt Verbal instructions in the Owner s Manual to use with the voice activation system Requirements Via the Control Display set a language that is also supported by the voice activation system so that the sooken commands can be identi fied Set the language refer to page 101 26 Using voice activation Activating the voice activation system _ 1 ai Press button on the steering wheel 2 Wait for the signal 3 Say the command A command that is recognized by the voice activation system is announced and dis played in the instrument cluster wt This symbol in the instrument cluster indi cates that the voice activation system is active If no other commands are available use func tion via iDrive Terminating the voice activation system Briefly press the button on the steer ing wheel or gt Cancek Possible commands Most menu items on the Control Display can be voiced as commands The available commands depend on the menu that is currently displayed on the Control Dis play There are short commands for many functions You may select lists such as phone lists via voice activation Read these lists out loud ex actly as they show in the respective list Having possible commands read aloud You can have available commands read
312. the ignition switched on the low beams light up Welcome lights When parking the vehicle leave the switch in position ZD or 40 the parking and interior lights light up briefly when the vehicle is un locked Activating deactivating On the Control Display 1 Settings 2 Lighting 3 Welcome lights Settings are stored for the profile currently in use Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Lights Controls Headlight courtesy delay feature The low beams stay lit for a short while after the radio ready state is switched off if the lights are turned off and the headlight flasher is switched on Setting the duration On the Control Display Settings Lighting Pathway lighting SYS Set length of time Settings are stored for the profile currently in use Automatic headlight control Position of switch 2 the low beams are acti vated and off automatically e g in tunnels in twilight or if there is precipitation The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up When emerging from a tunnel during the day the low beams are not switched off immedi ately but instead only after approx 2 minutes A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on The low beams always stay on when the fog lights are activated Personal responsibility The automatic headlight control cannot serve as a Substitute for your personal judg ment in de
313. the limited warranties provided with respect to your vehicle and for maintenance under the Maintenance Program during the appli cable warranty and maintenance coverage periods you are free to elect both during those periods and thereafter to have main tenance and repair work provided by other service centers or repair shops Where the Owner s Manual makes refer ence to parts and accessories having been approved by BMW those references are intended to reflect that those parts and accessories are recommended by BMW of North America LLC You may elect to use other parts and accessories but if you do we recommend that you make sure that any such parts and or accessories are appropri ate for use on your vehicle At page 7 under the warranty section s dis cussion of homologation where it states that you cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there the text should read that you may not be able to lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there At page 7 under the Parts and accesso ries section in the sixth sentence the word cannot should read does not At page 60 in the Check and replace safety belts section the text beginning This should only be done by your service center should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof BMW recommends having this work per formed by a service center as it is important that this safety feature functions
314. the vehicle cannot drive off Check Control message is displayed automatically for example gt On steep inclines gt From behind bumps in the road In these cases step on the accelerator pedal 150 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Driving comfort Controls Cruise control The concept The system maintains a preset speed via the buttons on the steering wheel The system brakes on downhill gradients if engine braking is insufficient General information Depending on the driving settings the features of the cruise control can change in certain areas Hints Unfavorable conditions Do not use the system if unfavorable conditions make it impossible to drive at a con stant speed e g gt On winding roads gt In heavy traffic gt On slippery roads in fog snow or rain or on a loose road surface Otherwise you could lose control of the vehi cle and cause an accident lt Controls Overview Press but Function ton 6 Cruise control on off interrupt refer to page 151 SET Store maintain speed refer to page 152 RES Resume speed refer to page 152 rocker switch Maintain store change speed refer to page 152 Buttons are arranged according to vehicle s series optional features and country specifica tions Switching on ka Press button on the steering wheel The marking in the speedometer is set to the current speed The cruise control can be used Sw
315. thers be malfunctioning under the fol lowing circumstances gt The battery of the remote control is dis charged Replace the battery refer to page 35 gt Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmit power gt Shielding of the remote control due to metal objects gt Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Opening and closing Controls Do not transport the remote control together with metal objects or electronic devices In the case of interference the vehicle can also be unlocked and locked from the outside with out remote control refer to page 39 For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC Federal Communication Commission regulations Operation is gov erned by the following FCC ID LX8766S LX8766E LX8CAS LX8CAS2 MYTCAS4 Compliance statement V VY VY yy V This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions gt This device may not cause harmful inter ference and gt this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Without remote con
316. timized fuel con sumption driving style The achieved extended range is displayed in the instrument cluster as bonus range Overview The system includes the following EfficientDynamics functions and displays gt ECO PRO bonus range refer to page 194 193 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Driving tips _ Pkg Saving fuel gt ECO PRO tips driving instruction refer to This function is only available in ECO PRO page 195 mode gt ECO PRO climate control refer to l page 194 ECO PRO climate control gt ECO PRO coasting driving status refer to ECO PRO climate control page 196 Climate control is set to be fuel efficient By making a slight change to the set tempera Activate ECO PRO ture or slowly adjusting the rate of heating or UE Press button repeatedly until ECO cooling of the car s interior fuel consumption PRO is displayed in the instrument can be economized cluster The mirror heating is made available when out side temperatures are very cold Configuring ECO PRO i 3 9 ECO PRO potential Via the Driving Dynamics Control Shows potential savings with the current set 1 Activate ECO PRO tings in percentages 2 Configure ECO PRO 3 Configure the program Display in the instrument cluster Display in the instrument display Via the iDrive When ECO PRO mode is activated the display 1 Settings switches to a special configuration 2 ECO PRO mode Some of the displays may differ
317. tire valve with the available connector on the sealant container 218 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Wheels and tires Mobility This prevents leftover sealant from escap ing from the container 4 Wrap the empty sealant container in suita ble material to avoid dirtying the cargo area 5 Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi cle Distributing the sealant Immediately drive approx 5 miles 10 km to en sure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the tire Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph 80 km h If possible do not drive at speeds less than 12 mph 20 km h To correct the tire inflation pressure 1 Stop ata suitable location 2 Screw the connection hose of the com pressor directly onto the tire valve stem 3 Insert the connector into the power socket inside the vehicle 4 Correct the tire inflation pressure to 2 5 bar gt Increase pressure with the ignition turned on or the engine running reel on the compressor gt Toreduce the pressure press the but ton on the compressor Continuing the trip Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph 80 km h Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor Replace the defective tire and the sealant con tainer of the Mobility System as soon as possi ble Snow chains Fine link snow chains Only certain types of fine link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of the
318. to 118 mph 190 km h H up to 131 mph 210 km h V up to 150 mph 240 km h W up to 167 mph 270 km h Y up to 186 mph 300 km h Tire Identification Number DOT code DOT xxxx xxx 0115 xxxx manufacturer code for the tire brand xxx tire size and tire design 0115 tire age Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Wheels and tires Mobility Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U S Department of Transportation Tire age DOT 0115 the tire was manufactured in the 1st week of 2015 Recommendation Regardless of wear and tear replace tires at least every 6 years Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A DOT Quality Grades Treadwear Traction AA A BC Temperature A B C All passenger car tires must conform to Fed eral Safety Requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov ernment test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 1 g times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart signifi cantly from the norm due to variations in driv ing
319. top amp Go ACC 144 Active Protection 133 Active seat front 55 Active seat ventilation front 56 Active seat ventilation rear 59 Active Steering integral 140 Adaptive brake assistant 136 Adaptive brake lights refer to Brake force display 133 Adaptive drive 139 Adaptive Light Control 105 Adaptive Light Control bulb replacement 232 Additives oil 225 Adjusting steering wheel 66 Adjustments seats head re straints 53 After washing vehicle 243 Airbags 109 Airbags indicator warning light 110 Air circulation refer to Recir culated air mode 167 Air dehumidifying refer to Cooling function 167 Air distribution manual 166 Air flow automatic climate control 166 252 Air outlets see ventila tion 168 Air pressure tires 207 Alarm system 47 Alarm unintentional 48 All around the center con sole 16 All around the roofliner 17 All around the steering wheel 14 All season tires refer to Win ter tires 215 All wheel drive 138 Alternating code hand held transmitter 173 Alternative oil types 225 Ambient light 108 Animal detection see Night Vision 127 Antifreeze washer fluid 82 Antilock Brake System ABS 136 Anti slip control refer to DSC 136 Approved axle load 249 Approved engine oils see Suitable engine oil types 225 Armrest refer to Center arm rest 181 Arrival time 99 Ashtray 174 Assistance when driving off 136 Attentiveness assistant 134 AUTO H button 76 A
320. trol From the outside Locking from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside with people inside the car as the vehicle can not be unlocked from inside without special knowledge Remove the key before pulling the door handle Before pulling the outside door handle remove the key to avoid damaging the paintwork and the key Unlock or lock the driver s door via the door lock using the integrated key refer to page 34 In some vehicle equipment versions only the driver s door can be unlocked or locked via the door lock In this case the other doors must be unlocked or locked from the inside Alarm system With some country versions the alarm system is not armed if the vehicle is locked with the integrated key In some country specific versions the alarm system is triggered when the vehicle is un locked via the door lock In order to terminate this alarm unlock vehicle with the remote control or switch on the igni tion if needed through emergency detection of the remote control refer to page 35 39 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Opening and closing From the inside Unlocking and locking Pressing the central locking system button locks or unlocks the vehicle with the front doors closed The vehicle is not secured against theft when locking The fuel filler flap remains unlocked In the event of a severe accident the vehicle is automatical
321. tronic instru ment cluster 86 Display in windshield 102 Display lighting refer to In strument lighting 107 Displays 87 Displays cleaning 245 Disposal coolant 227 Disposal vehicle battery 235 Distance control refer to PDC 153 Distance to destination 99 Divided screen view split screen 23 Door lock 39 Door lock refer to Remote control 34 Doors Automatic Soft Clos ing 40 Downhill control 138 Drive off assistant 136 Drive off assistant refer to DSC 136 Driver assistance refer to In telligent Safety 117 Driving Assistant refer to In telligent Safety 117 Driving Dynamics Con trol 141 Driving instructions break in 186 Driving mode 141 Driving notes general 186 Driving stability control sys tems 136 Driving tips 186 DSC Dynamic Stability Con trol 136 DTC Dynamic Traction Con trol 137 Dynamic Damping Con trol 139 Dynamic Drive 139 Dynamic Stability Control DSC 136 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 137 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Everything from A to Z Reference E ECO PRO 193 ECO PRO bonus range 194 ECO PRO display 193 ECO PRO displays 88 ECO PRO driving mode 193 ECO PRO mode 193 ECO PRO Tip driving in struction 195 EfficientDynamics 195 Electronic displays instru ment cluster 86 Electronic oil measure ment 223 Electronic Stability Program ESP refer to DSC 136 Emergency detection remote control 35 Emergency relea
322. ts clipped into their buckles Avoid pressure Do not allow the reels to retract the safety Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning belts until they are dry and do not use abrasive materials otherwise damage can result lt Carpets and floor mats BC l Clean with a clean antistatic microfiber cloth No objects in the area around the pedals Keep floor mats carpets and any other Long term objects out of the pedal area otherwise the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving and create the risk of an accident When the vehicle is shut down for longer than three months special measures must be taken Additional information is available from Do not place additional floor mats over existing the service center mats or other objects Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly attached to floor Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas tened again after they were removed for clean ing g lt Floor mats can be removed from the car s inte rior for cleaning If the floor carpets are very dirty clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner To prevent matting of the carpet rub back and forth in the direction of travel only Sensor camera lenses To clean sensors and camera lenses use a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass detergent Displays monitors Cleaning displays and screens Do not use any chemical or household cleaning agents otherw
323. types of alcohol e g M5 to M100 otherwise this could damage the engine and fuel supply system lt Recommended fuel grade BMW recommends AKI 91 Minimum fuel grade BMW recommends AKI 89 Minimum fuel grade Do not use any gasoline below the mini mum fuel grade as this may impair engine per formance lt If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat ing the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures This has no effect on the engine life Fuel quality The use of poor quality fuels may result in harmful engine deposits or damage Addi tionally problems relating to drivability start ing and stalling especially under certain envi ronmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude may occur If drivability problems are encountered we rec ommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade AKI num ber for a few tank fills To avoid harmful en Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Fuel Mobility gine deposits it is highly recommended to purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for unscheduled main tenance lt Diesel Low Sulfur Diesel The engine of your BMW is designed for diesel with low sulfur content Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel ASTM D 975 xx xx comply with the current standard in each case Use only Ultra Low Sulfu
324. unctions on other but tons repeat steps 3 to 5 The systems can be controlled using the inte rior rearview mirror buttons Special feature of the alternating code wireless system If you are unable to operate the system after repeated programming please check if the system to be controlled features an alternat ing code system Read the system s operating manual or press the programmed button on the interior rear view mirror longer If the LED on the interior rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for 2 seconds the system features an alternating code system Flashing and continuous illumination of the LED will re peat for approximately 20 seconds For systems with an alternating code system the universal garage door opener and the sys tem also have to be synchronized Please read the operating manual to find out how to synchronize the system Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec ond person To synchronize 1 Park the vehicle within range of the re mote controlled system 2 Program the relevant button on the interior rearview mirror as described 3 Locate and press the synchronizing button on the system being programmed You have approx 30 seconds for the next step 4 Hold down the programmed button on the interior rearview mirror for approximately 3 seconds and then release it If necessary repeat this step up to three times in order to finish synchronizati
325. ure are controlled automatically Depending on the selected temperature the AUTO intensity and outside influences the air is directed to the upper body and into the foot well The cooling function is switched on automati cally with the AUTO program Intensity of the AUTO program With the AUTO program activated the auto matic intensity control can be changed x Press the left or right side of the but ton decrease or increase the inten sity The selected intensity is shown on the display of the automatic climate control Temperature The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as quickly as possible if needed by using the maximum cooling or heating ca pacity and then keeps it constant Turn the ring to set the desired temperature Do not rapidly switch between different tem perature settings The automatic climate con trol will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature 170 Manual air distribution The air distribution can be adjusted to individ ual needs A Press button repeatedly to select a a program gt Upper body region gt Upper body region and footwell gt Footwell Air flow manual To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro gram first amp amp Press the left or right side of the but i ton decrease or increase air flow The selected air flow is shown on the display of the automatic climate control Switching
326. ure the battery so found on a separate sheet that it does not tip over during transport Fuses Hints Replacing fuses Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and do not replace a defective fuse with a substi tute of another color or amperage rating this could lead to a circuit overload ultimately re sulting in a fire in the vehicle Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse types and locations are stored in the fuse box in the trunk In the glove compartment Push the handle up arrow 1 and open the lid arrow 2 In the trunk p Open the cover on the right side trim arrow 236 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Breakdown assistance Mobility Breakdown assistance Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Hazard warning flashers The button is located in the center console Intelligent Emergency Request The concept In case of an emergency an Emergency Re quest can be made through this system General information Only press the SOS button in an emergency Hints Emerge
327. utomatically without in tervention by the driver in certain situations This can reduce the risk of a further collision and the consequences thereof Depressing the brake pedal can cause the ve hicle to brake harder This interrupts automatic 135 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Driving stability control systems Driving stability control systems Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Antilock Brake System ABS ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking The vehicle contains its steering power even during full brake applications thus increasing active safety ABS is operational every time you start the en gine Brake assistant When you apply the brakes rapidly this system automatically produces the greatest possible braking force boost It reduces the braking dis tance to a minimum during emergency stop This system utilizes all of the benefits provided by ABS Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the emergency stop Adaptive brake assistant In combinati
328. ve press twice gt If interrupted press once The displays go out The stored desired speed is deleted Interrupting E Press button on the steering wheel ea If interrupting the system while stationary press on the brake pedal at the same time The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations gt When the brakes are applied gt When selector lever position D is disen gaged gt When DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated or DSC is deactivated When DSC is actively controlling stability gt When SPORT is activated with Driving Dynamics Control gt Ifthe safety belt and the driver s door are opened while the vehicle is standing still gt Ifthe system has not detected objects for an extended period e g on a road with very little traffic without curb or shoulder markings 146 gt Ifthe detection range of the radar is dis rupted e g by dirt or heavy fog Maintaining storing and changing the speed Hints Adjusting the desired speed Modify desired speed to road conditions and be ready to brake at all times otherwise there is the risk of an accident lt Differences in speed Large differences in speed relative to other vehicles cannot be compensated by the system such as in the following situations gt When fast approaching a slowly moving vehicle gt When another vehicle suddenly swerves into the wrong lane gt When stationary objects ar
329. ve see user s manual for Navigation En tertainment and Communi cation ConnectedDrive Services Continued driving with a flat tire 113 116 Control Display 18 Control Display settings 100 Controller 18 Control systems driving sta bility 136 Convenient opening with the remote control 37 Coolant 226 Coolant level 226 Coolant temperature 94 Cooler 177 Cooling function 167 Cooling maximum 167 Cooling system 226 Cornering light 105 Corrosion on brake discs 188 Cosmetic mirror 174 254 Courtesy lamps during un locking 37 Courtesy lamps with the vehi cle locked 38 Cruise control 151 Cruise control active with Stop amp Go 144 Cruise Control refer to Active Cruise Control 144 Cruising range 94 Cupholder 182 Curb weight 249 Current fuel consumption 95 D Damage tires 214 Damping control dy namic 139 Data technical 248 Date 94 Daytime running lights 105 Defrosting refer to Windows defrosting 166 Dehumidifying air 167 Deleting personal data 24 Deletion of personal data 24 Destination distance 99 Diesel exhaust fluid at low temperatures 204 Diesel exhaust fluid having refilled 204 Diesel exhaust fluid on mini mum 204 Diesel exhaust fluid replen ishing yourself 204 Diesel particulate filter 187 Digital clock 94 Dimensions 248 Dimmable exterior mirrors 65 Dimmable interior rearview mirror 66 Direction indicator refer to Turn signals 79 Display elec
330. via the speaker you can nevertheless still be heard at the BMW Response Center Initiating an Emergency Request automatically Under certain conditions an Emergency Re quest is automatically initiated immediately af ter a severe accident Automatic Collision Noti fication is not affected by pressing the SOS button Warning triangle C N SSS The warning triangle is located in the container on the inside of the trunk lid Unscrew the wing nut to open 238 First aid kit Note Some of the articles have a limited service life Check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any expired items promptly Storage ka S The first aid kit is located in the container on the inside of the trunk lid Unscrew the wing nut to open Jump starting General information If the battery is discharged the engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables Only use jumper ca bles with fully insulated clamp handles Hints Do not touch live parts To avoid the risk of potentially fatal in jury always avoid all contact with electrical components while the engine Is running To prevent personal injury or damage to both vehicles adhere strictly to the following proce dure Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Breakdown assistance Mobility Preparation Bodywork contact between vehicles Make sure that there is no contact be tween the
331. viduals Malfunction deactivation and after de ploying the airbags Do not touch the individual components imme diately after the system has been triggered otherwise you may risk burns Only have the airbags checked repaired or dis mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by the service center or an authorized repair shop for handling explosives Non professional attempts to service the sys tem could lead to failure in an emergency or unintentional activation of the airbag both may lead to injury lt Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors Functional readiness of the airbag system e e When the ignition is reel on the warn l l PN ing lamp in the instrument cluster lights up briefly and thereby indicates the op erational readiness of the entire airbag system and the belt tensioner Airbag system malfunctioning gt Warning lamp does not come on when the ignition is turned on gt The warning lamp lights up continuously Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Safety Controls In case of a malfunction have airbag sys tem checked immediately In case of a malfunction have airbag system checked immediately otherwise there is a risk that the system does not function as expected in case of a Severe accident lt Automatic deactivation of the front seat passenger airbags The system reads if the front passenger seat is occupied by measur
332. vious prewarning Braking intervention The warning prompts the driver himself herself to react During a warning the maximum brak ing force is used Premise for the brake boos ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on the brake pedal The system can assist with automatic braking intervention if there is risk of 123 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Controls Safety a collision The intervention can bring the vehi cle to a complete stop The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti vated Above approx 130 mph 210 km h the braking intervention occurs as a brief braking pressure No automatic delay occurs The braking intervention can be interrupted by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac tively moving the steering wheel Object detection can be restricted Limitations of the detection range and functional restric tions are to be considered System limits Detection range The system s detection potential is limited Thus a warning might not be issued or be is sued late E g the following situations may not be de tected gt Slow moving vehicles when you approach them at high speed gt Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you or sharply decelerating vehicles Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance gt Two wheeled vehicles ahead of you Functional limitations Th
333. ystems otherwise malfunc possible danger of collision with vehicles at tions of the individual braking systems might speeds above approx 3 mph 5 km h Time of lead to accidents lt warnings may vary with the current driving sit uation Ata glance Detection range Button in the vehicle It responds to objects if they are detected by Intelligent Safety button the system Hints Radar sensor Personal responsibility The system does not serve as a substi tute for the driver s personal judgment of the traffic situation Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi cle s surroundings at all times otherwise acci dents are still possible despite all warnings lt Adapting your speed and driving style The radar sensor is located in the lower area of the front bumper The displays and warnings of the system do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the Always keep radar sensor clean and unob traffic conditions lt structed Be alert Due to system limitations warnings may be not issued at all or may be issued late or improperly Therefore always be alert and 122 Online Edition for Part no 01 40 2 954 177 II 15 Safety Controls Camera The camera is found near the interior rearview mirror Keep the windshield in the area behind the in terior rearview mirror clean and clear Switching on off Switching on automatically The system is

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Sony VAIO SVS15113FXB notebook  Philips DVP3254K User's Manual  山岳トイレし尿処理技術 実証試験結果報告書  Manual del usuario  Harman Kardon PA5800 User's Manual  2826 WATER BUTT PUMP  Tucano Clippy  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file